JP6919680B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching device enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is generated, and a lottery is performed using a variable display device. Variable display for teaching the results is performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-154110

By the way, it is required to take a more suitable response to a predetermined input from the outside of the gaming machine.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately responding to an input.

The gaming machine of the present invention
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means and
An approach detection means that can detect the approach of a predetermined object in a non-contact manner,
In a gaming machine provided with a visual mode changing means capable of changing the visual mode.
The gaming machine
In the detection state by the approach detecting means, the state can be changed to a predetermined state in which it can be monitored that the detected state is canceled, and when the condition for changing the state to the predetermined state is satisfied, the visual mode of the visual mode changing means is changed. A means that can execute state teaching control that changes and teaches predetermined information,
A means for continuing the state teaching control for a predetermined period even when the detection state by the approach detecting means is canceled in the predetermined state is provided .
The visual mode changing means is provided at a position where at least a part of the predetermined object arranged at a position detectable by the approach detecting means can overlap with the front view of the gaming machine . ..

The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a rotating body type gaming machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to take a suitable response to the input.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame, the game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical composition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows the end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the trigger correspondence unit control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for determining a decorative pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot display processing. It is a top view of the upper plate. It is sectional drawing of the effect button unit. It is sectional drawing of the effect button unit. It is sectional drawing of the effect button unit. It is sectional drawing of the effect button unit. It is a flowchart which shows the additional effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the validity period preparation process. It is a flowchart which shows the action input process. It is a flowchart which shows the button effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the air production execution processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action group selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the button effect selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the air production selection table. It is a front disassembly schematic diagram which shows the interlocking mechanism in another embodiment. It is a side view exploded schematic diagram which shows the interlocking mechanism in another embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .. In FIG. 3, for convenience, the nails and accessories arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate, and the left side frame component 11c and the right side frame component 11d are extruded from an aluminum alloy. It is made of a material, and each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and the lower hinge 82 rotatably support the upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right side frame constituent portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 projecting from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 for locking the locking member of the locking device 600 are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on the inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later, is projected from the lower receiving portion 85 toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame component 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed between the inner frame 12 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened to the front side with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38.

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with the opening / closing axis set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame set 14 may be configured to be directly openly supported by the outer frame 11 instead of via the inner frame 12.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided on the front side of the front frame set 14 at the center of the lower portion thereof, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect can be produced by a decorative pattern display device 42 or the like, which will be described later. It may be damaged or the content of the production may be changed.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launch handle (hereinafter, simply referred to as a handle) 18 projecting toward the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detecting means (variable resistor) (variable resistor) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 as a launching means, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotating operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed and operated by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launching of the game ball by the launching device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball while holding the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 as a storage supply unit is provided above the lower plate 15. On the upper surface side of the upper plate 19, a storage recess 19a is formed which temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward the launching device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate connecting passage 71 and the discharge port 16 which will be described later.

A ball lending button 121, a return button 122, and a ball removing button 123 are provided on the right side of the storage recess 19a of the upper plate 19. When the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the lending ball is operated according to the operation. It is supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit. Further, when the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball that had been there is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Further, various lamps and other light emitting means are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to the change of the gaming state or the like. For example, an annular illumination portion 102 having a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101. Further, error indicator lamps 104 that light up when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. A large number of fine through holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14 are formed in the upper portion of each error indicator lamp 104 in the annular illumination portion 102. ..

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are attached to each other in a front and rear pair, but is attached after being assembled into a round shape as a whole.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 on the rear side of the window hole 39 in a state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39. There is. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning unit (starting port) 33, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device 43L and a second special display device 43R, and variations. A specific lamp 40 and the like are arranged. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning openings such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32 as a variable winning means, and a starting winning unit 33, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or the upper plate 19 or A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the lower plate 15. For example, if there is a ball in the starting winning unit 33, 3 pieces, if there is a ball in the general winning opening 31, 10 pieces, and if there is a ball in the variable winning device 32, there is a ball. Fifteen game balls are paid out. It should be noted that various winning openings in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out (a prize ball is given) according to the winning (winning) of the game balls correspond to the winning means. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out opening 36, and a game ball that has not won a prize in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 is discharged to the outside of the game area through the out opening 36. .. Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which the game ball can be won in the jackpot state. Although not shown, the variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a shutter for opening and closing the large winning opening, a large winning opening solenoid for operating the shutter, and a large winning opening. Equipped with a count switch 223 that detects the game ball that has entered the mouth, the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is opened and closed by driving and controlling the big winning opening solenoid and opening and closing the shutter. Switching.

The starting winning unit 33 includes an upper winning opening 33a and a lower winning opening 33b, and a pair of opening / closing members 33c provided on both sides of the lower winning opening 33b. When the opening / closing member 33c opens and closes according to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, the game ball flowing down the side of the lower winning opening 33b is guided to the lower winning opening 33b between the open state and the closed state where the lower winning opening 33b is not guided. It is configured so that the state can be changed. As will be described in detail later, the starting winning unit 33 includes a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b that detect game balls that have entered the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b, respectively. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a or 224b, a winning or losing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a big hit state, and special display devices 43L and 43R (and variable display means described later) are used. The decorative symbol display device 42) is configured to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery. Then, when a big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery, a big hit state as a special game state in which the variable winning device 32 is opened is given.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are a low probability state in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the winning / failing lottery, and a high probability state in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the winning / failing lottery. Further, the opening / closing member 33c is opened relatively frequently to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the lower winning opening 33c, and the opening / closing member 33c is hardly opened and the game ball is opened to the lower winning opening 33b. There is a low ball entry state that makes it difficult to enter the ball. Hereinafter, the state of low probability state and low ball entry state is referred to as "normal mode", the state of low probability state and high ball entry state is referred to as "time reduction mode", and the state of high probability state and high ball entry state is referred to. A certain state is called "probability change mode".

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode and the probability variation mode are continued until the jackpot state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode is the special display devices 43L, 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 even if the jackpot state does not occur. When the fluctuation display in is performed 100 times, the process ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

Further, the jackpot types of the present embodiment are 16 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "16RS"), 7 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "7RS"), and 7 round normal jackpot (hereinafter "7RN"). There are three types. Then, with respect to "16RS", the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened, as one round. , It is repeated 16 times, while for "7RS", after it is repeated 7 times, the jackpot state ends. Further, after the jackpot state of "16RS" and "7RS" ends, the "probability variation mode" is given, and after the jackpot state of "7RN" ends, the "time reduction mode" is given.

The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are each composed of a 7-segment display device of a type capable of displaying two characters (and dots), and are visible to the player (in this example, the variable winning device 32). It is installed on the right side). Then, the switching display (variable display) is performed on the first special display device 43L triggered by the entry of the game ball into the upper winning opening 33a of the starting winning unit 33, and the entry of the game ball into the lower winning opening 33b. With this as an opportunity, the second special display device 43R is configured to perform switching display (variable display). The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by the main control device 261 as the main control means described later.

In addition, after the fluctuation display is performed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the display mode when the fluctuation display is stopped, the result of the winning / failing lottery, that is, "big hit" or "missing" It is definitely displayed that there is. For example, when a game ball wins in the upper winning opening 33a, the lighting mode (combination of lighting segments) is switched and displayed (variable display) at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L. When the predetermined time elapses, one of the lighting modes is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, when the "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery, the corresponding lighting mode is displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and the big hit state occurs.

Further, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, not only is it taught that the "big hit" was won, but also the type of the big hit state, that is, which of "16RS", "7RS", and "7RN" is used. Is also taught. For example, when "7.7." Is finally displayed (stopped and displayed) on the first special display device 43L (or the second special display device 43R), "16RS" is given and "n. When "0." is displayed, "7RN" is given, and so on. Further, there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R that teach one jackpot type, and one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. Further, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing the variable display or the decision display, the other is turned off (“-” is displayed). If the variable display and the decision display are not performed in either case, "-" is displayed in both cases.

Further, when a game ball newly wins a prize in the start winning unit 33 during the fluctuation display of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, the fluctuation display for that amount is the fluctuation display performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of. That is, the variable display is put on standby (held). The maximum number of times the variable display is held is determined for each pachinko machine model, but in the present embodiment, it corresponds to the game ball that has won the upper winning opening 33a and the game ball that has won the lower winning opening 33b. Then, the variable display up to 4 times (8 times in total) is reserved.

Further, the number of holdings of the fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "first fluctuation display") based on the entry of the game ball into the upper winning opening 33a is lit and displayed by the first holding lamp 46a capable of emitting blue light. The number of holdings of the fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "second fluctuation display") based on the entry of the game ball into the lower winning opening 33b is lit and displayed by the second holding lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. It has become. The holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided with four as well as the maximum number of holdings for each of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display, and the number of the holding lamps 46a and 46b is the same as the number of the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display held. Light. The display contents of the holding lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub control device 262 as a sub control means described later. If a game ball newly wins the start winning unit 33 during the jackpot state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved.

The held fluctuation display is basically digested in the order in which it was held, but when both the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display are held (hold lamp 46a, When one or more of 46b are lit), the second variation display is preferentially digested. That is, unless the second variable display triggered by winning the lower winning opening 33b is completely digested, the first variable display triggered by entering the upper winning opening 33a is not performed. ing. For example, when one of the first hold lamps 46a is lit, a game ball enters the lower winning opening 33b and one of the second hold lamps 46b is lit, the first variation display is postponed. The second variation display will be performed first.

In the variation identification lamp 40, which of the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b corresponds to the variation display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 (first variation display or second). It is for indicating which of the variable displays), and is arranged at a position visible to the player (in this example, below the special display devices 43L and 43R). The fluctuation specific lamp 40 includes an LED having a blue emission color and an LED having a red emission color, and when the first variation display is performed in the decorative pattern display device 42, the variation identification lamp 40 emits blue light and the second variation. When it is displayed, it emits red light.

The through gate 34 is configured so that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass through one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and starts when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225. A ball entry assist lottery for whether or not the winning unit 33 is opened is performed, and a variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry assist lottery is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. Then, when the ball is won by the ball entry assist lottery, the lower winning opening 33b (opening / closing member 33c) of the starting winning unit 33 is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that fluctuates and displays when the through gate 34 passes, and a decorative symbol display device that fluctuates and displays according to the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. 42 is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with the first holding lamp 46a, the second holding lamp 46b, and the holding lamp 44.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to lightly display "○" or "×" as a normal symbol, and for example, every time the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol is displayed as "○" → "×" → Switching display (variable display) at high speed, such as "○" → ... Then, when the fluctuation display is stopped for a few seconds with the "○" symbol (winning symbol), the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a predetermined time. The display content of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later.

Further, when the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variation display for that amount is performed after the variation display performed at that time is completed. It has become. That is, the variable display is put on standby (held). The maximum number of times the variable display is held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the number of times of holding is lit and displayed by the holding lamp 44. There is.

The decorative symbol display device 42 of the present embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be able to display the decorative symbol as identification information in a variable manner. The display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub control device 262 assists the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The display content is determined, and the display control is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas of upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are provided in each symbol display area. It is displayed sequentially (variably displayed), and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area). .. For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed by the main control device 261, the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R display the jackpot, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the jackpot. (For example, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area have the same decorative symbol), and the jackpot state is started.

Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination corresponding to the jackpot, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in, for example, the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area as a preliminary step. In this way, the reach state is a state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area. Of course, just because a reach state occurs does not necessarily mean that it will be a big hit, and it may come off.

In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, when the same decorative symbol (reach symbol) as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area (Zoro). When the eyes are stopped and displayed), the jackpot state is given. Further, in the case of odd-numbered doublets, "16RS" or "7RS" in which the probability variation mode is given occurs after the end of the jackpot state, and in the case of even-numbered doublets, "16RS", "7RS", Alternatively, either "7RN" is given. In addition, the combination of decorative patterns other than doublet basically teaches "off".

Further, in the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42. A ball entry port 151 is provided in the upper part of the center frame 47, and the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 151 is formed inside the center frame 47 and is formed along the side portion of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on the stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via the warp flow path 152 extending vertically. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the top of the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed on the inner back side of the center of the stage 153. .. The pocket 154 communicates with the guide passage 155 leading to the game area directly above the starting winning unit 33 (upper winning opening 33a), and the game ball entering the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability. The ball is entered into the starting winning unit 33 (upper winning opening 33a).

Further, the game board 30 is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is attached with a rail 50 that guides the game ball launched from the launching device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball launched by the rotation operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component portion 52. The game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surfaces of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the rail 50 may flow backward until the game ball launched by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. Be taken.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate continuous passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate continuous passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper plate 19. Further, there is a gap at a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has a gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball that has fallen from the gap to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball returns to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. It is discharged.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game ball paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate continuous passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate and a passage leading to the lower plate continuous passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to almost close the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, in the state where the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portion on the entrance side of the lower plate connecting passage 71. It should be noted that the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance in the closed state of the front frame set 14. The game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate connecting passage 73 are filled with the game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower plate connecting passage 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower plate connecting passage 71), and the lower plate connecting passage 71 overflows. It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate continuous passage 71. By the presence of the fullness detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are staying in the lower plate continuous passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected by the fullness detection switch for a predetermined time, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full by using the display and voice of the decorative symbol display device 42 is notified. Is controlled. When the stagnation of the game ball in the lower plate continuous passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is released.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 6 and the like. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally so as to be partially overlapped in the front-rear direction, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying the game balls. And a protective cover made of resin are attached. The payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack. Therefore, the unit is referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. The 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is attached to.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is housed in the back surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (storage box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged. Further, the storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning unit 33, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings (not shown). The game ball collected by the ball collection mechanism is guided to the discharge passage portion 217, which will be described later, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main control device 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member has a structure that cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily detect that the substrate box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the various winning openings corresponding to various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. Further, the starting winning unit 33 is provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b corresponding to the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b, respectively. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board surface relay board that is electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221 and the count switch 223 and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. .. The first board surface relay board relays the winning port switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261 as the main control means, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the start winning switches 224a and 224b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are transmitted based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, a solenoid for a large winning opening is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 to open the large winning opening with the variable winning device 32, and a pair of opening / closing members 33c are provided by the starting winning unit 33. A solenoid for winning openings that opens and closes is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a combination of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with the open / close axis extending in the vertical direction as the axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal plate 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, terminals for outputting information on the current gaming state (big hit state, probability variation mode, etc.), front frame set 14 and inner frame detected by the open detection switches 91 and 92 described later. A terminal for outputting information on opening of 12, a terminal for outputting information on various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower plate full tank error, a tank ball no error, and a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. Terminals and the like for outputting information on the number of balls are provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded with, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 also covers the upper portion and the right portion (the portion on the left side in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism portion 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened on the upper side is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclining toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor or the like. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism unit 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power supply from the outside. There is. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a. The payout means is configured by the payout mechanism unit 352, the payout control device 311 and the like.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball recovery mechanism described above flow in, and the game balls are placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have won each winning opening such as the general winning opening 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 is also connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. You may do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251 the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is attached to.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one substrate (printed circuit board).

Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside can be visually recognized.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as ball clogging in the payout motor unit occurs, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball clogging can be eliminated (return to the normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power. Is thrown in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotated in one direction. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5). The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in the above, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided in the lower right lower part of the inner frame 12 on the back side (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main control device 261 and the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body, and when the detection unit is immersed in the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off by pressing the detection unit on the back surface of the front frame set 14 when the front frame set 14 is closed, and the detection unit returns to the protruding state when the front frame set 14 is opened. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by being pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11, and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 2, 35 and the like, in the present embodiment, the effect button unit 120 is provided on the upper surface side of the upper plate 19 as the storage supply unit. In particular, in the present embodiment, the effect button unit 120 is arranged behind the storage recess 19a. The effect button unit 120 includes an effect button 125 as an operation means and a unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 capable of detecting a player's hand close to the effect button 125 in order to operate the effect button 125.

As shown in FIG. 36, the upper plate 19 is formed with a mounting hole 401 for exposing the effect button 125 mounted on the lower surface side of the upper plate 19 upward. Further, the effect button unit 120 is provided with a mounting base 403 in which an insertion opening 402 corresponding to the mounting hole 401 is formed and is mounted on the upper surface side of the upper plate 19, and the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 is mounted on the mounting base 403. It is attached to the upper surface side of.

The unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 is arranged on the left front side of the effect button 125 with the main purpose of detecting the proximity of the player who operates the handle 18 with the right hand to the effect button 125 by the left hand (see FIG. 35). .. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 and the like, among the front frame set 14, it is between the upper plate 19 and the window portion 101 in the vertical direction, and is substantially equal to the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 in the horizontal direction. A frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 is provided at the same position. Although the details will be described later, basically, in the present embodiment, the player's hand is set to the effect button 125 by the state in which the detection is performed by both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. It will be determined that it is close to. In the present embodiment, the proximity detection means is configured by the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2.

As shown in FIG. 36, the effect button 125 is substantially accommodated inside the housing 404 fixed inside the upper plate 19 and inside the housing 404, and is provided so as to be relatively displaceable up and down with respect to the housing 404. It includes a cylindrical main body portion 405 and an operation portion 406 that is inserted inside the main body portion 405 and is provided so as to be relatively displaceable up and down with respect to the main body portion 405.

The housing 404 is provided with a stepping motor 407 as a driving means for displacing the main body 405 up and down, and a pinion 408 for transmitting the driving force of the stepping motor 407 to the main body 405. On the other hand, on the outer surface of the main body portion 405, a pair of rack portions 409 extending vertically and meshing with the pinion 408 are provided. Then, when the stepping motor 407 is driven, the main body portion 405 is displaced upward or downward with respect to the housing 404 (upper plate 19). Although not shown, a pair of guide rails extending vertically in the main body 405 are provided so that the rack portion 409 and the pinion 408 do not disengage from each other, and the housing 404 supports each guide rail. Each pair of guide protrusions is provided.

The operation unit 406 has a substantially cylindrical shape with an outer diameter that is one size smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 405, and has a substantially cylindrical shape that is attached to the upper component portion 411 whose upper portion is closed and the lower portion of the upper component portion 411. It includes a lower component 412. The upper component 411 is made of a transparent resin, and a locking portion 415 capable of locking the LED substrate 413 on which the three-color LED 414 is mounted is provided inside the upper component 411. Further, the characters "PUSH" are attached to the upper surface of the upper component portion 411, and the operation surface of the effect button 125 is formed by the upper surface. Further, the upper component 411 is formed with a wiring hole 417 and a heat radiating hole 418 through which the wiring 416 of the LED substrate 413 is passed. Although not shown, three guide rails extending vertically are provided on the outer surface of the upper component 411 so that the operation unit 406 can slide up and down smoothly without rotating inside the main body 405. At the same time, a pair of guide convex portions for supporting each guide rail are provided inside the main body portion 405.

The lower component 412 has a base cylinder 421 that is colored (for example, dark blue or black) and has the same outer diameter as the upper component 411, a support wall 422 that closes the upper part of the base cylinder 421, and an inner diameter of the upper component 411. It has substantially the same outer diameter, and includes a substantially cylindrical mounting cylinder 423 that projects upward from the upper surface of the support wall 422. The mounting cylinder 423 is provided concentrically with the base cylinder 421, and a male screw is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the mounting cylinder 423. On the other hand, a female screw is formed in the lower part of the inner peripheral surface of the upper component portion 411. Then, after installing the LED substrate 413 inside the upper component 411, the upper component is screwed to the portion where the female screw of the upper component 411 is formed and the mounting cylinder 423 of the lower component 412. The 411 and the lower component 412 are integrated to form the operation unit 406.

Further, the support wall 422 is formed with a plurality of upper support protrusions 425 for projecting downward from the lower surface thereof and for supporting the upper portion of the coil spring 424 as a urging means for urging the operation portion 406 upward. There is. On the other hand, on the bottom surface of the main body 405, a plurality of lower support protrusions 426 for supporting the lower portion of the coil spring 424 are provided at a portion facing the upper support protrusion 425. Then, by mounting the coil spring 424 over the upper support protrusion 425 and the lower support protrusion 426, the operation portion 406 is urged upward with respect to the main body portion 405. In addition, although not shown, the main body 405 has a stopper that projects toward the inner peripheral side of the main body 405 with respect to the upper edge of the main body 405 after the operation unit 406 is attached to the main body 405. Is attached, thereby preventing the operation unit 406 from falling off from the main body unit 405. In the present embodiment, the guide rail of the operation unit 406 is provided in the upper component unit 411, but it is provided in the lower component unit 412, and the reliability of the alignment between the upper support protrusion 425 and the lower support protrusion 426 is determined. May be improved.

Further, an operation detection sensor 427 as an operation detection means including a light projecting unit 427a and a light receiving unit 427b provided at a position facing the light projecting unit 427a is provided below the inner peripheral surface of the main body unit 405. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 37, when the operation unit 406 is pushed down against the urging force of the coil spring 424, the light receiving unit is emitted from the light emitting unit 427a by the colored lower component 412 of the operation unit 406. The light that should be incident on 427b is blocked. As a result, the operation of the operation unit 406 is detected. When the operation of the operation unit 406 is released (when the hand is released from the operation unit 406), the coil spring 424 expands due to its own elastic force, and the operation unit 406 is displaced in the direction (upward) protruding from the main body unit 405. The original state (the state in which the light of the light projecting unit 427a is not blocked by the operation unit 406) is returned to the original state. In the present embodiment, the position of the operation unit 406 in the state where the light of the light projecting unit 427a is blocked by the operation unit 406 corresponds to the operation position, and the position of the operation unit 406 in the unblocked state is the non-operation position. Equivalent to. It is also possible to configure the operation detection means with other sensors and switches.

Further, the bottom surface of the main body 405 is made of rubber that comes into contact with the lower side of the operation unit 406 (lower component 412) when the operation unit 406 is pushed down to the maximum against the urging force of the coil spring 424. A cushioning material 428 is provided. In the present embodiment, the upper support protrusion 425 and the lower support protrusion 426 that support the coil spring 424 are configured so as not to come into contact with each other even when the operation unit 406 is pushed down to the maximum (upper in the vertical direction). The length (height) of the base cylinder 421 of the lower component 412 is longer than the total length of the support protrusion 425 and the lower support protrusion 426).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, since the main body portion 405 is configured to be vertically displaceable with respect to the housing 404 and, by extension, the upper plate 19, the operating portion 406 is not operated. Even if there is, the protruding length of the operating portion 406 that protrudes upward of the mounting base 403 through the mounting hole 401 of the upper plate 19 and the insertion opening 402 of the mounting base 403 is not constant, and it depends on various situations. It changes with the displacement of the main body 405. As shown in FIG. 36, the main body portion 405 of the present embodiment has a reference position in which the operation portion 406 protrudes from the upper surface of the mounting base 403 (exposed surface that exposes the operation portion 406 to the outside) by a predetermined length, and is shown in FIG. 38. The operating unit is located above the reference position and below the reference position as shown in FIG. 39, even though the player is not operating the operation unit 406. The 406 (operation surface) is configured to be displaced from the immersion position (accommodation state) in which it is immersed below the mounting base 403.

Further, a seal lip 429 made of rubber or thermoplastic resin (for example, EPDM or TPO) extending outward is provided on the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the base cylinder 421 of the lower component 412 over the entire circumference. .. The tip of the seal lip 429 is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the main body 405, and when the operating portion 406 is displaced vertically and vertically, the tip of the seal lip 429 is in sliding contact with the inner peripheral surface of the main body 405. The seal lip 429 makes it difficult for air to leak between the operation unit 406 and the main body unit 405. In addition, an exhaust hole 431 penetrating vertically is formed in the substantially center of the bottom wall portion of the main body portion 405. Then, when the operation portion 406 is pressed, the air inside the main body portion 405 is discharged from the exhaust hole 431 (basically only from the exhaust hole 431) to the outside of the main body portion 405.

Further, in the present embodiment, an exhaust passage 432 for guiding the air discharged from the exhaust hole 431 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. The exhaust passage 432 is connected to a substantially tubular connecting pipe 433 connected to the lower surface of the main body 405 and a connecting pipe 433 so as to surround the exhaust hole 431, and follows according to the relative displacement of the main body 405 in the vertical direction. The air discharged from the main body 405, which is connected to one branch of the flexible hose 434, the Y-shaped tube 435 connected to the flexible hose 434, and the Y-shaped tube 435, is sent to the back side of the pachinko machine 10. It is provided with a first passage 436 that guides the air to the handle 18 and a second passage 437 that is connected to the other branch of the Y-shaped pipe 435 and guides the air discharged from the main body 405 to the handle 18. Further, the first passage 436 and the second passage 437 are provided with a flow rate changing means, a first valve 438 and a second valve 439 as a target switching means, and adjust the flow rate of air in the first passage 436 and the second passage 437. It is configured to be possible.

As the first and second valves 438 and 439, shutters capable of closing the first and second passages 436 and 437 are rotatably provided in the first and second passages 436 and 437 to rotate the shutters. By adjusting the moving angle, the flow rate of air that can pass through the first and second passages 436 and 437 may be adjusted (the opening degree of the first and second valves 438 and 439 may be adjusted). A shutter capable of closing the first and second passages 436 and 437 is provided so as to be able to appear and disappear in the first and second passages 436 and 437, and the amount of protrusion of the shutter into the first and second passages 436 and 437 is adjusted. By doing so, the flow rate of air that can pass through the first and second passages 436 and 437 may be adjusted (the opening degrees of the first and second valves 438 and 439 may be adjusted). Further, for example, instead of providing the first and second valves 438 and 439 in the first and second passages 436 and 437 of the Y-shaped pipe 435, a proportional control valve may be provided at the branch point of the Y-shaped pipe 435. good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small vent holes 18b (outlets) are formed on the front surface side of the handle 18, and the second valve 439 of the second passage 437 is in an open state. If the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 is operated while the first valve 438 of the first passage 436 is closed, the operation unit 406 is operated via the exhaust passage 432 and the ventilation hole 18b. The wind hits the hand (palm) holding the handle 18.

In addition, the first passage 436 is provided with an air pump 440 (blower) that sends air to the effect button 125 side via the first passage 436. That is, by driving the air pump 440 with the second valve 439 closed, the air pressure inside the main body 405 is increased to change the force required for the operation of the operation unit 406, or the operation unit 406 is vibrated. (Air is sent intermittently at a rapid pitch). In the present embodiment, the air supply source (effect button 125 and air pump 440) and the outlet (vent hole 18b) are provided by the connecting pipe 433, the flexible hose 434, the Y-shaped pipe 435, the first passage 436, and the second passage 437. A communication pipe is configured to communicate with. Further, the outlet (vent hole 18b) of the first passage 436 and the outlet (exhaust port) of the second passage 437 form an interlocking means.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of motion detection sensors ME1, ME2, ME3, ME4, ME5, ME6, and ME7 for detecting the player's motion are provided on the front side of the front frame set 14. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, along the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14, the upper center (ME1), upper right (ME2), upper left (ME3), and lower right (ME4) of the window portion 101. ), Lower left (ME5), right side of the handle 18 (ME6), and between the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 (ME7). Further, as shown in FIG. 4, motion detection sensors ME8, ME9, and ME10 are also provided on the game board 30, and in the present embodiment, the lower right (ME8), lower left (ME9), and center of the center frame 47. It is provided on the upper part (ME10). The motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10 include an infrared light projecting unit and a light receiving unit (not shown), and when a hand is held in front of the motion detection sensor ME, the infrared rays are reflected by the hand or the like and are incident on the light receiving unit. As a result, detection is performed. In the present embodiment, the motion detection means is configured by these motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 (the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 also serves as the proximity detection means as described above). .. Hereinafter, for convenience of description, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are also collectively referred to as "motion detection unit 451" (see FIG. 7).

Further, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10 (and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2) are all facing forward. Further, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME10, and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are provided with a three-color LED 452 (light emitting means), respectively. In this embodiment, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME10, the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2, and the three-color LED 452 are unitized. Further, as will be described in detail later, for example, in a state where the detection of the operation detection sensor 427 (input operation to the motion detection unit 451) is enabled, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME10, and the frame side proximity detection sensor. When the detection by the AE2 is performed, the attached three-color LED 452 lights up or blinks. Further, the three-color LED 452 of the motion detection unit 451 is used not only for teaching information about the motion detection unit 451 but also for suggesting information and lighting in other productions.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) as the main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the data is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is used when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, the value of I / O, etc. (same as above). Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and conversely, restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is the main process when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination. The same applies hereinafter). Is executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the payout control device 311 and the sub control device 262, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the ordinary symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the above-mentioned special display devices 43L and 43R and the ordinary symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input / output port 505 has a winning port switch 221, a count switch 223, a starting winning unit switch 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, various switches of the handle 18, and the like. Various electric parts such as various detection switches, various boards, and solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 are connected. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output ports 505 are configured by these terminal portions and the like.

The sub control device 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, input / output port 554, bus line 555, which are memories for temporarily storing various data, etc., are provided, and other various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission / reception circuits (not shown) are provided. It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected to the input / output port 554. Further, a speaker SP, hold lamps 46a and 46b, an effect button 125, various illumination units, and lamps 102 to 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 display that the jackpot has been won, and the sub control device 262. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the user, a display (ancillary effect display) that matches the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the CPU 511, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. If the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

In the backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of power off, each register, and the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. Similar to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured so that the power failure signal SK1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 There is a command buffer that stores the commands sent from.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set as the initial setting. It is turned off when the process is restored or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and the main control device 261 to recover power. These are the three payout return commands that are sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the payout permission flag, initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the command is returned to the previous position, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment process is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main control device 261 and the launch control device 312, the payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 is a ball lending operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. It is electrically connected to each of the above, and it takes in the command of the ball lending operation by the player and outputs it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the detection that the player is touching the handle 18 by the sensor signal, and the launch prohibition button 18a for stopping the launch ( The launching device 60 is driven on condition that the launching device 60 is not operated (see FIG. 1), and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with the instruction from the sub control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 259, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for VDP526) is executed. As a result, the display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP526 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like with the necessary operating power to each of them through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power via a control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the control system drive voltage of 5 volt for a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure), the data of the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. NS.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means draws lots using various counter information at the time of the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a winning / failing lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot state, a type determination counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type (type lottery), and decorations. The variable selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not to generate the reach state in the symbol display device 42, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the first and second special display devices. Used for the lottery (ball entry assist lottery) of the first variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2 used for determining the variable display time of the 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and the normal symbol display device 41. It is decided to use the ordinary symbol random number counter C4. The fluctuation selection counter C3 is also used for a lottery for each reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is disengaged and fluctuated. Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for the fluctuation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined by the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time, that is, the effect pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined.

The counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counter returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 stores a special variable hold area as a hold storage area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the change selection counter C3, and a normal symbol random number counter C4 for storing the values. There is a variable hold area. The ordinary variable hold area includes one execution area and four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas). In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times.

Further, the special fluctuation holding area includes a first special fluctuation holding area and a second special fluctuation storage area each having four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas), and one execution area. In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are chronologically arranged according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper winning opening 33a. Stored in. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are chronologically arranged according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower winning opening 33b. Stored in. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R can be held up to 4 times, respectively.

Explaining each counter in detail, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reaches the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 599), and then 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b of the starting winning unit 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is "7,307", which is a high probability. The number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode) is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two hit / fail determination tables that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot, and "7,307" is a jackpot. There is a first hit / fail judgment table stored as a value and a second hit / fail judgment table in which "8 to 16, 308 to 316" are stored as jackpot values.

In the normal mode, the probability of winning a big hit in the winning / losing lottery (big hit probability) is 1/300, and the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 for teaching the result of the ball entry assist lottery is 6 seconds. Yes, and when the player wins the ball entry assist lottery, the lower winning opening 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for 0.6 seconds.

In the probability variation mode, the jackpot probability is 1/30, which makes it easier to hit the jackpot as compared with the normal mode. Further, in the probability variation mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the ball entry assist lottery is 2 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal mode, and when the ball entry assist lottery is won, the lower winning opening 33b Is released three times, and each opening time is 2 seconds. That is, in the probability variation mode, the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the normal mode, the opening time of the lower winning opening 33b per winning of the ball entry assist lottery is longer, and the number of times of opening is larger. Become. As a result, the time zone in which the lower winning opening 33b is open becomes longer, so that the game ball frequently enters the lower winning opening 33b (becomes a high winning state), and the winning / failing lottery is held. It will be done continuously and will be in a good condition. In the high ball entry state, the probability that the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery) may be higher than in the normal mode.

In the time reduction mode, the jackpot probability is 1/300. Further, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the ball entry assist lottery is 2 seconds, and when the ball entry assist lottery is won, the lower winning opening 33b is opened three times and the lower winning opening 33b is opened. Each opening time is 2 seconds. That is, the time reduction mode has the same low probability as the normal mode, but the jackpot probability is the same as the probability variation mode when only the operation of the start winning unit 33 is viewed. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot state of "7RN" is completed, the time reduction mode is set over a total of 100 fluctuation displays performed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the time reduction mode ends when the special display devices 43L and 43R perform a total of 100 fluctuation displays even if the jackpot state does not occur, and then shifts to the normal mode.

The type determination counter C2 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 19, for example, to reach the upper limit value (that is, 19) and then return to the lower limit value of 0. Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. Then, when the winner is won in the winning / failing lottery, the type of the jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (the type lottery is performed), and the determined type of jackpot state is given. The Rukoto.

The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b of the starting winning unit 33, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. NS.

The fluctuation selection counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, the upper limit value (that is, 238) is reached, and then the value returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In the present embodiment, after the reach state is generated for the decorative symbol by the variable selection counter C3, the reach state is also generated as the "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. After that, a lottery will be drawn for "reach other than front-back deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and "complete deviation" in which the reach state does not occur. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 and the reach type. Values of "0 to 238" are stored in the reach judgment table, C3 = 0,1 corresponds to the front-back out-of-reach reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than the front-back out-of-front, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It is configured to handle disconnection.

The variation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b of the starting winning unit 33, the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503. NS.

Further, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 59, for example, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59), and then becomes the lower limit value. The other variable type counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, for example, is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 37, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 37), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of the decorative symbol such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the reach occurs. A finer symbol variation mode such as the elapsed time until the (middle symbol in this example) stops is determined. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1 or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

Further, the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the decorative symbol display device 42 determines the variation pattern at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol.

The size and range of each counter are only examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the fluctuation selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 9, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9), the value returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired. There are six random number values, the range of which is "3 to 8". When the value of the winning ordinary symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the variation display is predetermined in the ordinary symbol display device 41. After the time is played, the symbol corresponding to the winning (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the lower winning opening 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of, and for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

If there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. Further, in the external output processing of the normal processing described later, the prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and the prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (the game ball is paid out). NS). Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Further, in step S303, the random number update process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (599 and 19 in the present embodiment, respectively). When it reaches 238 and 9), it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the starting winning unit 33 is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a winning / failing random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variation selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided. In the present embodiment, the winning / failing random number storage area uses 2 bytes to store the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area each use 1 byte to store the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3. In addition, the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by winning the upper winning opening 33a, and the lower holding counter Nb that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by winning the lower winning opening 33b. Is provided.

First, in step S501, it is determined from the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b whether or not the game ball has won the lower winning opening 33b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the lower hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 (the jackpot random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer) updated in the random number update process of step S303 is used. Each stored value) is stored in the first area (win / fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) among the vacant hold areas of the special fluctuation hold area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot is performed. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In the following step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs type determination processing to determine the type of. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the value is deviated based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, the details of the jackpot determination process in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches either "7" or "307", which is the value stored in the first hit / fail determination table. To determine. By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is simplified and described, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is "307". If a negative determination is made in, the negative determination is made in step S5101.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends. In this embodiment, in addition to the hit / miss random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the hit / miss flag is not separately provided, and information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs in the hit / miss random number storage area. Is memorized (overwritten). As described above, the winning / failing random number storage area uses 2 bytes, and in step S5102, for example, "101010101010101010" is set for the winning / failing random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting for the hit / miss random number storage area will be described as turning on the first hit / miss flag.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value stored in the second hit / fail determination table "8 to 16, 308". It is determined whether or not it is any of "~ 316". By the way, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" are values that are big hits only in the probability variation mode. Even in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the jackpot match as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process ends. Note that turning on the second hit / fail flag here means that, for example, "1100110101001100" is set for the hit / miss random number storage area. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is "off" even in a high probability state, the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the information related to the pass / fail is stored using 2 bytes. Therefore, for example, when noise occurs, the pass / fail flag (stored contents of the pass / fail random number storage area) is rewritten. , It is possible to prevent a situation in which a big hit state occurs even though the player is not a winner, or a big hit state does not occur even though the player is a winner. Further, the pattern (combination of "1" and "0") set in the winning / failing random number storage area in the jackpot determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the winning / failing random number storage area. be.

Next, the type determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second hit / fail flag is set to ON in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (a jackpot state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area It is determined whether or not the value matches the value "0" corresponding to "16RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, the 16RS flag or the like is not separately provided, and the winning type random number storage area is "16RS" or "7RS". , It is configured to store (overwrite) the information indicating that it is "7RN". As described above, 1 byte is used for the winning type random number storage area, and in step S5203, for example, "10101010" is set for the winning type random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, setting a pattern indicating a jackpot type such as "16RS" in the winning type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag indicating the jackpot type (16RS flag or the like). explain.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value "12" corresponding to "7RN" in consideration of the type determination table in step S5204. It is determined whether or not it matches any of "~ 19". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 7RN flag is turned on (for example, "00011111" is set for the winning type random number storage area) in step S5205, and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5204, the 7RS flag is turned on (for example, "00010000" is set for the winning type random number storage area) in step S5206, and then this process is terminated.

The pattern (combination of "1" and "0") set in the winning type random number storage area in the type determination process is not used when the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It is a pattern.

Next, the reach determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first hit / fail flag is set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (a big hit state always occurs), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a jackpot state does not occur (may be out of order) at least in a low probability state, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5302, and a new hit state is created. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "front-back deviation reach". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5303, the front-rear flag indicating the occurrence of front-rear out-of-reach is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3, the front and rear flags are not separately provided, and the information that the reach random number storage area is "out of front and back reach". Is memorized (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte, and in step S5303, for example, "10101010" is set for the reach random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting for the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front and rear flags.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5304, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area corresponds to "reach other than front-rear deviation". It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values "2 to 21". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, this process ends after turning on the flags other than before and after in step S5305. Note that turning on the flags other than before and after here means that, for example, "11001100" is set for the reach random number storage area.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, when the variation display ends without going through the reach state, the present process ends as it is. The pattern set in the reach random number storage area (combination of "1" and "0") in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the reach random number storage area. be.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 following step S507, the starting command setting process is performed. In the starting command, which of the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b is triggered by the hold-stored fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display). In addition to the information indicating the above, information indicating the results of the jackpot determination process, the type determination process, and the reach determination process is included, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201).

After the processing of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the upper winning opening 33a is determined by the first starting winning unit switch 224a. Determined by detection information. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when affirmative determination is made, in step S510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning the upper prize opening 33a is the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). ) To determine whether or not it is less than. If a negative determination is made in step S510, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S512, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is set to a vacant hold area (win / fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) in the special variation hold area. ). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot is performed. The details of the jackpot determination process have already been described above.

In the following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs type determination processing to determine the type. The details of the type determination process have already been described above.

In the following step S515, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the reach is based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs reach determination processing to determine the type of. The details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

After step S515, in step S516, the starting command setting process is performed, and this process ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and then the jackpot determination process and the type determination process are performed. , And the reach determination process is executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area (working area) for temporarily storing these counter values when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired is provided, and the jackpot determination process and type of the information stored in the temporary storage area are provided. After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the determination process and the reach determination process are stored in the hold area of the corresponding special change hold area.

Next, the through-gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending fluctuation displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, on the condition that the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603 and the normal hold counter is reached. Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the following step S604, a random number related to the result is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passing process is completed.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and in step S401, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt process is performed. finish.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. The NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state. Wait processing is executed for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 in order to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, in the following step S104, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so that the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power interruption. That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well.

In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 or the like). Further, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like) in the same manner. That is, in step S113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. In addition, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of power failure restoration) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power off is restored, and in step S108, the power off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S210 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S211 and S212 are executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, control signals based on the settings of the special display devices 43L, 43R, the start winning unit 33, etc., which were updated in the previous normal processing, are transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to the sub side. Executes external output processing such as sending to each control device.

For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, the variation pattern command, the symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub control device 262 so that the decorative symbol display device 42 can perform the display effect according to the display performed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, and the like, determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.). Is instructed to the display control device 45 to be displayed (variable display) on the decorative symbol display device 42.

For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative pattern such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. The fluctuation pattern command and the like are originally binary numbers of 2 bytes (the same output method as the hold information command), but are shown in hexadecimal numbers every 4 bits for convenience. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode, any one of "FF10", "FF11", "FF12", "FF13", "FF14", "FF15", and "FF16" is set as the variation pattern command. Further, in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, "FD10", "FD11", "FD12", "FD13", "FD14", "FD15", and "FD16" are set. On the other hand, in the sub control device 262, the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation type of the decorative symbol is stored in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variation display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, the voice, and the like.

Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative pattern and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

The normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effect is displayed except for changes in the decorative pattern. Then, "FF11" or "FD11" is set for the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach, depending on the mode. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variation display time is shortened as compared with the normal mode even in the case of various reach. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is "15 seconds" in the normal mode, and "10 seconds" in the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode.

The super reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. be. In the present embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared, and the variable display time differs depending on the type of super reach. Then, "FF12" or "FD12" is set in the fluctuation pattern command for Super Reach SR1, "FF13" or "FD13" is set for Super Reach SR2, and "FF14" or "FD14" is set for Super Reach SR3. Is set.

Premium reach is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs, and during variable display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), characters with a pattern different from that of super reach are displayed in addition to the decorative symbols. This is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of anticipation. Two types of premium reach, PR1 and PR2, are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time differs depending on the type of premium reach. Then, in the case of premium reach PR1, "FF15" or "FD15" is set as the fluctuation pattern command. For premium reach PR2, "FF16" or "FD16" is set.

In addition, "FF10" or "FD10" is set as the fluctuation pattern command according to the mode for the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to "complete deviation" that does not reach any reach state. In the present embodiment, the variable display time that is completely out of alignment is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and "6 seconds" in the probabilistic mode and the time reduction mode.

Further, the sub control device 262 determines the stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command and displays it after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, and is a combination of probabilistic jackpot symbols, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of front-back off symbols, a combination of symbols other than front-back off, and a completely out-of-order symbol. It specifies five categories of combinations of. These categories are indicated by, for example, "AA11", "AA12", "AA13", "AA14", and "AA15", and any one of them is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbol in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 stops and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the symbol commands.

Hereinafter, the classification of the stop symbol and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described. The combination of probabilistic jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of odd numbers of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. In addition, the combination of normal jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of even-numbered doublets of any of 2, 4, 6, and 8. In the present embodiment, in the case of the probability variation jackpot ("16RS" or "7RS"), the variation display is stopped and displayed by either the combination of the probability variation jackpot symbol or the normal jackpot symbol, and in the case of the normal jackpot ("7RN"). Usually, the variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols.

Then, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, "AA11" is set in the symbol command, and in the case of a normal jackpot, "AA12" is set in the symbol command. Then, when "AA11" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the combinations of the symbols consisting of doublets 1 to 9 as the stop symbol, and determines "AA12". Is set, one of the combinations of symbols consisting of doublets 2, 4, 6 and 8 is determined as a stop symbol.

The combination of front and rear out-of-bounds symbols corresponds to the "front-back out-of-reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, and corresponds to the combination of front-back and out-of-front symbols. "AA13" is set for the symbol command. The combination of symbols other than front and rear disengagement corresponds to the "reach other than front and rear disengagement" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the symbol corresponding to the combination of symbols other than front and rear disengagement. "AA14" is set in the command. The combination of completely off symbols corresponds to "complete off" in which even reach does not occur, and "AA15" is set for the symbol command corresponding to the combination of completely off symbols. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays the combination of the front-rear off symbols, the combination of symbols other than the front-rear off, and the combination of the completely out-of-order symbols, it is "off".

As will be described in detail later, when "AA13" to "AA15" are set in the symbol command, the sub control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. To determine as. In this embodiment, three commands "AA13" to "AA15" are prepared as the symbol commands for disengagement, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, there is only one type of symbol command for disengagement. The sub-control device 262 may be configured to determine the combination of decorative symbols.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when those counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. do. Then, the update values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step S205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are controlled, and the jackpot determination and the setting of the variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. The details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step S206, the variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the variable winning device 32 is performed. As a result, when a big hit state is reached, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening) is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the control related to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step S208, the trigger response unit control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the start winning unit 33 is performed. The details of the unit control process corresponding to this trigger will be described later.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S210, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (4 msec in this example). ) Has passed or not. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counters CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (step S211 and step S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Further, in step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated randomly, and the value varies as well. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

Further, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processes after step S213 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. Be struck. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the stack pointer value is backed up in the backup area 503a in step S215. Remember in.

After that, in step S216, a power off notification command indicating that the power is cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S217 and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

The process of step S209 is the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in steps S201 to S208, or the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than that in the case where each processing is in progress. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Further, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power is cut off can be reliably stored. ..

Next, the first display control process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, the jackpot situation storage area described later is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not the state is other than the jackpot state at present. During the jackpot state, the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L and 43R until the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. There is a round period, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period after the final round until the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R can be started. In the jackpot status storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in a state other than the jackpot state, and in the jackpot state, "1" is stored during the opening period and the interval period, and "2" is stored during the round period. , "3" is memorized during the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the jackpot situation storage area.

It should be noted that it is for convenience that numerical values such as "0" to "3" are stored in the jackpot situation storage area, and actually, the jackpot situation storage area uses 2 bytes, which is explained below. However, the fact that, for example, "1010101010101010" or the like is set in the jackpot situation storage area will be described as "0" or the like being stored.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if a jackpot state is in effect, the present process is terminated as it is, while if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the first display described in detail later is given in step S802. By observing the setting status of the middle flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) are performing variable display. Specifically, when the first display flag is on, it is considered to be in the variable display, and when the first display flag is in the off state, it is considered to be in the stop display, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped. .. As will be described in detail later, the first display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are turned on. The variable display is turned off when the stop display is displayed.

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if the jackpot is not in progress and the fluctuation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S803, and the fluctuation display triggered by the entry into the lower winning opening 33b (second fluctuation display). ) Is counted, and it is determined whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb is larger than 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if even one second variation display is held and stored, 1 is subtracted from the lower hold counter Nb in step S804. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is reserved and stored by the determination process in step S803, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. That is, even if the first variation display is held and stored earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is prioritized and digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

In the following step S805, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd special variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas in order from the hold 1st area to the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. After step S805, in step S806, a process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. After that, in step S807, the variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no second variation display is held and stored, in step S808, the variation display triggered by the entry into the upper winning opening 33a (first variation display). (Variation display) is counted, and it is determined whether or not the hold counter Na is larger than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S808, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step S809. In the following step S810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 1st special variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas in order from the hold 1st area to the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. After step S810, in step S811, a process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. After that, the variable display setting process is performed in step S807, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is one, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area are used when performing the fluctuation display based on the data. In addition, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability state (probability variation mode) by referring to the mode storage area described later in detail. In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, any value of "11", "12", or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, "11" corresponds to the normal mode, and "12" corresponds to the time reduction mode. Corresponds to, "21" corresponds to the probability variation mode. That is, in the step S901, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state by determining whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, in a high probability state, in step S902, the first or second hit / fail flag (FIG. It is determined whether or not one of the jackpot determination processes (see 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, in a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), in step S903, the hit / miss random number storage area is taken into consideration, and whether the first hit / miss flag is on. Determine if not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag (see the type determination process of FIG. 15) is turned on by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If the affirmative determination is made in step S904, that is, if it is "16RS", the 16RS pattern setting process (process for setting the variation pattern command and the symbol command) is performed in step S905. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the occurrence of "16RS", and is special based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. The variation patterns (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S905, the process proceeds to step S914, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S904, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the 7RS flag is turned on by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, if it is "7RS", the 7RS pattern setting process is performed in step S907. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S914.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S906, that is, if it is "7RN", the 7RN pattern setting process is performed in step S908. After step S908, the process proceeds to step S914.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S902 or step S903, that is, when it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot, in step S909, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and the front and rear flags (FIG. It is determined whether or not the reach determination process of 16) is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, that is, if the reach is "out of front / rear reach", the front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S910, and then the process proceeds to step S914.

If a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S911, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flags other than the front and back are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S911, that is, if the result is "reach other than front / rear deviation", the reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S912, and then the process proceeds to step S914.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S911, that is, if it is "completely out of alignment", the deviation variation pattern setting process is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S914.

In step S914, the start setting process indicating that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) is satisfied in the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed. In this start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and the setting process of the first display timer is performed.

The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. .. The fluctuation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. When a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting of the first display timer. , The switching display (variable display) is started in the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the variation start of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the special display device. At the same time as the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by combining the symbols based on the symbol command. After the end of step S914, the variation display setting process ends.

In this embodiment, the process of acquiring the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 of the start winning process and storing it in the special fluctuation holding area, the jackpot determination process of steps S505 and 513, and the variation display setting process. The winning / failing lottery is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903 for setting various jackpot flags based on the winning / failing flag of.

Returning to the description of FIG. 18, when affirmative determination is made in step S802, that is, when variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S812 to perform subtraction processing of the first display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the first display timer after the subtraction. At this time, step S813 is positively determined when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes “0”.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, the switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this process is terminated. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, the timing of the first display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the first display flag is turned off in step S814, and the stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S815. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, the stop display is performed in the stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type and deviation. Further, a control signal indicating that the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped is also output to the sub control device 262. As a result, the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the symbol command and the fluctuation pattern command output at the start of the variation display, information on the stop mode of the decoration symbol display device 42 again. There is no need to add. Further, again, the stop display by such special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for directing). There is.

Subsequently, after performing the discrimination information setting process in step S816, this process ends. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag (16RS flag, 7RS flag, 7RN flag) indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is turned on by referring to the hit / miss random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the process proceeds to the process for initializing the jackpot state in step S1002 or lower. That is, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is turned on by referring to the hit / miss random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003, "16" is set in the round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, "7" is set in the round number counter in step S1004. After step S1003 or step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, "1" is set for the jackpot status storage area. In the following step S1006, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set for the first variable timer used for control during the jackpot state (open / close control of the variable winning device 32). Subsequently, in step S1007, "8" indicating the maximum number of winning balls per round is set to "8" for the winning counter for counting the number of game balls entered in the variable winning device 32. .. The value of the winning counter is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 to determine whether or not the ball has entered the variable winning device 32 during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing, and then to the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that the ball has entered, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1008, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the jackpot state is set. The opening command includes information on the type of jackpot, and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the total number of rounds in the jackpot state. After step S1008, this process ends.

In addition, in the jackpot state, promotion of the appearance jackpot type, etc. (for example, when an even number of doublets is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, "7RS" or "16RS" is won in the jackpot state immediately after. You may teach that you have done this, or if the odd number of doublets is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, you may teach that you won "16RS" in the jackpot state immediately after that). ..

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined to be "off", the process proceeds to step S1009. In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the value set in the mode storage area is "12" indicating that the mode storage area is in the time reduction mode, that is, whether or not it is in the time reduction mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1009, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1009, the value of the fluctuation count counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1010 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, "100" is set in the fluctuation count counter at the end of the jackpot state of "7RN", and the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once. Every time it is done, 1 is subtracted in the step S1010.

In the following step S1011, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1011, that is, if the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) have not yet performed the variable display 100 times since the time reduction mode was started, this process is performed as it is. To finish.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1011, "11" indicating that the mode is in the normal mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1012. That is, the time reduction mode ends when the variable display is performed 100 times on the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1012, this process ends.

Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the jackpot situation storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the jackpot state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot state is not reached, the present process is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "1" is set in the jackpot status storage area in the above-mentioned discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot status is in the jackpot state (when any of "1" to "3" is set in the jackpot status storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. The value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "2000" is set in the first variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

In the following step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not "1" is set in the jackpot status storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "2" is set for the jackpot status storage area in step S1205. Subsequently, in step S1206, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set for the first variable timer.

After step S1206, in step S1207, a process for opening the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1208, a round command for transmitting information to the sub-control device 262 to start the round is set. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined whether or not "3" is set in the jackpot status storage area in step S1209. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the jackpot state are completed and the ending period is started, "3" is set for the jackpot status storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1210.

In the following step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1212, and "1" is set for the jackpot status storage area. After that, in step S1213, the value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set for the first variable timer, and "8" is set for the winning counter in step S1214. Further, in step S1215, a process of closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1216, an interval command for transmitting information to the sub-control device 262 to start the interval is set. After that, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there is time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or closed state of the variable winning device 32, the process proceeds to step S1217 and is variable. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter that measures the number of balls entered into the winning device 32 is "0". The winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of winnings per round at the start of the jackpot state and the start of the interval. Then, every time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32, 1 is subtracted.

If a negative determination is made in step S1217, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1217, that is, if the end of the round comes without waiting for the elapse of the set period of the round, the process proceeds to step S1210. As a result, if eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round will end promptly at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not passed. Become.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, that is, when all rounds in the jackpot state have been digested, the process proceeds to step S1218, and "3" is set for the jackpot situation storage area. After step S1218, in step S1219, the value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the first variable timer.

In the following step S1220, "7" is set for the winning counter. When the process of setting the ending after step S1218 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1217, the value of the winning counter is "0". If the value of the winning counter is set to "0" as it is at the start of the ending period, affirmative determination is suddenly made in step S1217 in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. Therefore, by inputting a temporary numerical value other than "0" ("7" in this example) to the winning counter in step S1220, the ending period is completed. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1220, in step S1221, a process of closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in the following step S1222, an ending command for transmitting information to the sub-control device 262 to start ending is set. After that, this process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, when the ending period ends and the time to end the jackpot state comes, the process proceeds to step S1223 and the end setting process is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area is set and the fluctuation count counter is set.

Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the 7RN flag is set to ON in the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If the affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step S1403, "100" is set for the fluctuation number counter. The fluctuation count counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (how many fluctuations are displayed) as described above, and the mode storage area is set to "12" in the mode storage area setting process. When is set, "100" corresponding to 100 fluctuation displays is set as the value of the fluctuation count counter. After step S1403, this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, when "16RS" or "7RS" is stored in the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, the mode storage area is stored in step S1404. The value "21" corresponding to the probability variation mode is set for. As a result, the probability change mode is given after the jackpot state ends. After that, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 21, after step S1223, in step S1224, “0” indicating that the jackpot situation storage area is not in the jackpot state is set. After that, in step S1225, a jackpot end command for transmitting information to the effect that the jackpot state is terminated is set to the sub control device 262, and then this process is terminated. The jackpot end command includes the game mode set in the end setting process, the number of times information of the fluctuation number counter, and the like.

Next, the second display control process in step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 23, in step S2101, switching by the normal symbol display device 41 is performed by determining whether or not the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is on. Determine whether or not the display (variable display) is in progress. When the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 stops the variable display. It is considered that the stop display is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than 0. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this process is terminated as it is.

Further, if the fluctuation display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc> 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the normal variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas in order to the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area.

After that, in step S2105, the start setting process is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) is satisfied. Specifically, the second display timer is turned on and the second display timer is set. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is 6 seconds, so "1500" is set for the second display timer. Further, in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 2 seconds, "500" is set in the second display timer. When a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the setting in the start setting process, the normal symbol display is displayed. The switching display is started in the device 41. As described above, the ordinary symbol display device 41 is configured to light and display "○" or "×" as an ordinary symbol, and if the displayed is "○", "×" or "×" is displayed. If it is, it is switched to "○" and displayed. Then, after the end of step S2105, the second display control process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2106, and the second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and the normal symbol stop display setting for displaying the stop on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the normal symbol display device 41 is stopped is output in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, if it is a winning symbol, the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, it lights only for a few seconds), and if it is not, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is achieved based on the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary fluctuation holding area. Specifically, "3 to 8" out of the numerical values 0 to 9 of the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 is the winning value.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, the normal symbol discrimination information setting process is performed, and this process is completed. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening / closing the start winning unit 33 is performed. Specifically, the ball entry assist flag is set to ON, the second variable flag is set to ON, the opening time is set to the second variable timer, and the drive count counter is set to the drive count of the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c). Set (number of times of opening).

The ball entry assist flag is discrimination information for determining whether or not the process is in progress based on the winning of the ball entry assist lottery. The second variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in the open state. The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the start winning unit 33, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of opening. The drive count counter is a means for measuring the number of times the opening / closing member 33c is opened (remaining number of times).

Further, based on the on / off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the start winning unit 33 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a control signal for opening the opening / closing member 33c is output to the starting winning unit 33, and the starting winning unit 33 is opened. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a control signal to close the opening / closing member 33c is output to the starting winning unit 33, and the starting winning unit 33 is closed (the opening / closing member 33c is closed). , It becomes impossible to enter the game ball into the lower winning opening 33b).

In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the start winning unit 33 are different between the high ball entry state (probability variation mode and time reduction mode) and the low ball entry state (normal mode). In the present embodiment, in the high ball entry state, "500" is set for the second variable timer and "3" is set for the drive count counter. On the other hand, in the low ball entry state, "150" is set for the second variable timer and "1" is set for the drive count counter.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", it is switched to "x", and if it is "x", it is switched to "○". As a result, the timing of the second display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms.

Next, the trigger response unit control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the ball entry assist flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the value of the second variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S2202.

In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the value of the second variable timer is "0". do. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the opening time of the predetermined start winning unit 33 has not yet elapsed, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205 and the second variable flag is turned off. In the following step S2206, the value of the drive count counter is subtracted by 1. After that, in step S2207, it is determined whether or not the value of the drive count counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, the ball entry assist flag is turned off in step S2208, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning ball assist lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the start winning unit 33 is opened three times based on the winning ball assist lottery. When there is a remaining number of times, a value corresponding to the interval time (for example, “100”) is set for the second variable timer in step S2209. After step S2209, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the interval period is between the start winning unit 33 being opened three times (the starting winning unit 33 is in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S2210, and the second step is performed. It is determined whether or not the value of the variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2210, that is, if the interval period has not yet elapsed, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2210, the second variable flag is turned on in step S2211, and a value corresponding to the opening time (“500” in this example) is set for the second variable timer in step S2112. After that, this process ends.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first, the reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 25, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the payout control device 311 temporarily waits for another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the receive interrupt process is executed. When the receive interrupt process is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3001 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in order to store the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3002. Turn on the command reception flag to end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, it is shown in FIG. 27. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command has been received, the process may be shifted to the command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First of all, in step S3101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, the external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, does the RAM determination value match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off? Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the initialization process of RAM 513 after step S3115 is performed. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, the processing at the time of power restoration (at the time of power failure recovery). Process) is executed. That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored, in step S3110, the power cut occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of the prize ball is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is enabled in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set, the power supply is cut off, so that the processes after step S3123 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination processing described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127, and the backup area 513a is calculated. The RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

In the process of step S3122, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is larger than that in the case where each process is in the middle. It is less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the determination processing of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 28.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) described above.

If the command reception flag is determined to be off in step S3301, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of the command read from the RAM 513 in the processes of steps S3304 to S3306 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is a prize ball command. Whether or not it is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on, and if the payout permission flag is turned off, the main control unit is turned on when the power is turned on. Since the control device 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the initialization timing being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be surely set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, the command determination process ends without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, the prize balls will not be paid out if they remain. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being inflicted with a loss.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to allow the payout of the prize ball. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the number of prize balls received in step S3310 is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , The payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of the prize ball. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command instructing the payout of the prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out at an early stage for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO). The command judgment process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the flow chart of FIG. 27 will be returned to the description. When the command determination process is completed, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this process ends as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state is determined when the state return operation is started. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, the payout motor is clogged with balls, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state). ..

After that, in step S3205, the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower plate 15 is full, the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set and the lower plate is not full. , Execute the setting of the lower plate full tank release state. Further, in step S3206, the setting of the tank ball-less state (ball out state) or the tank ball-less release state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, and the setting of the state without a tank ball and the state without a tank ball is executed. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is made.

Subsequently, the payout control process of the prize ball and the rental ball is executed. Specifically, the payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal operation is not started and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibe motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a jammed state. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

In the following step S3903, a hold information storage process is performed in which the information of the starting command output from the main control device 261 is stored in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553. As described above, the starting command indicates whether the variable display is triggered by the entry of the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b, and indicates whether the variable information corresponds to the jackpot. Information, information indicating the jackpot type, and information indicating the reach type are included.

The hold information storage area includes a first hold information storage area and a second hold information storage area each having four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas), similarly to the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. It has one execution area. In the first hold information storage area, information on whether or not a jackpot is made, a jackpot type, and a reach type are set according to the reception history of the starting command based on the first fluctuation display (information stored in the first special fluctuation hold area). Fluctuation information such as is stored in time series. Further, in the second hold information storage area, change information is stored in chronological order according to the reception history of the starting command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the information of the first variation display (variation information) triggered by the entry into the upper winning opening 33a and the information of the second variation display triggered by the entry into the lower winning opening 33b. As a result, the fluctuation information stored in the first and second special fluctuation holding areas of the main control device 261 can be grasped in the sub control device 262 as well.

Hereinafter, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. 32. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, whether or not the starting command corresponds to the entry into the lower winning opening 33b (variation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area) in step S4102. To determine. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to the entry of the upper winning opening 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation holding area), in step S4103, the first command is made. 1 Inkment of the fluctuation hold counter Nd is performed after counting the number of holdings of the fluctuation information held and stored in the holding information storage area.

In the following step S4104, information on whether or not the starting command is a jackpot, information on the jackpot type, information on the reach type, and the like are stored in the first vacant hold area of the first hold information storage area.

Further, in the following step S4105, the advance notice information storage process is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the effect displays related to each other are intentionally derived (so-called "continuous notice" is performed) in a plurality of continuous variable displays. Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to perform continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information. Of the areas, the fluctuation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4104.

The continuous advance notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 49), and then returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The continuous advance notice counter is updated periodically, and the value of the continuous advance notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous advance notice counter buffer) each time.

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 9), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The notice type counter is updated periodically, and the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer) each time.

Then, in the advance notice information storage process, when the fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the value of the continuous advance notice counter and the value of the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each hold area and execution area of the hold information storage area are provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notice is to be derived.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice adequacy determination table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to give a continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when deciding the mode of the continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice pass / fail judgment tables and notice tables are provided, and the advance notice pass / fail judgment table and the notice table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the fluctuation information.

After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first holding lamps 46a that is in the extinguished state (for example, the leftmost of the four first holding lamps 46a that are extinguished) is turned on. Make it a state. The first holding lamp 46a of the present embodiment emits blue light. In the following step S4107, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed, and then this process is terminated.

In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107, when the value of the upper fluctuation hold counter Nd is "2" or more, a big hit is made based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area. The advance notice hit / fail judgment table corresponding to each type, reach type, and game mode is referred to, and it is decided whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode is based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first reserved information storage area. Refer to and decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag of all the holding areas in which the fluctuation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area is turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the lower winning opening 33b (variation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area), the step. Proceeding to S4108, the lower fluctuation hold counter Ne, which counts the number of hold of fluctuation information held and stored in the second hold information storage area, is incremented by 1.

After that, in step S4109, information on whether or not the starting command is a jackpot, information on the jackpot type, information on the reach type, and the like are stored in the first vacant hold area of the second hold information storage area. .. In the following step S4110, the value of the continuous advance notice counter and the value of the advance notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the hold area in which the fluctuation information is newly stored in the step S4109 of the second hold information storage area.

After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second holding lamps 46b that is in the extinguished state (for example, the leftmost of the four second lamps 46b that are extinguished) is turned on. And. The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light. In the following step S4112, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed, and this process is terminated. In the continuous advance notice lottery process of step S4112, only the continuous advance notice lottery process of step S4107 corresponds to the entry of the ball into the lower winning opening 33b, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Returning to the description of FIG. 29, if a negative determination is made after step S3903 or in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3912.

In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of jackpot and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (big hit symbol) at the time when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped when the jackpot state occurs, and in the present embodiment, it is used as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. Is prepared with 9 (0 to 8) counter values. That is, the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of jackpot is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

When the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is "AA11" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stopped, it is based on a table (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) that is not shown. For example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1" (doublet), if it is 1, it is "2" (doublet), and so on. The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub control device 262 receives the symbol command, as will be described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. It may be.

Further, when the symbol command is "AA12" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is "2" (doublet), and if it is 2-4. Determine the combination of jackpot symbols, such as "4" (doublet), "6" (doublet) for 5, 6 and "8" (doublet) for 7,8. ..

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning / failing lottery is missed. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the column, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stop symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. .. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the front-rear reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front-rear, and the complete. It is stored in one of the outlier symbol buffers.

Here, the update processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 31, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, when the lower symbol counter CR is updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4001. Further, when the upper symbol counter CL is updated in the previous update process, an affirmative judgment is made in step S4002. Then, if the update time of the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the middle symbol counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, CR update process, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. As a result, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined that the reach symbols are combined (YES in S4006), and in step S4007, whether or not the jackpot symbols are combined (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). To determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the present process is terminated as it is without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front-back and out-of-front symbols. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear out-of-bounds symbols (front and back out reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is before and after the RAM 553. It is stored in the out-of-reach symbol buffer, and this process is terminated. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than the front and rear disengagement (reach other than the front and rear disengagement) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is performed. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the front and rear disengagement of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

Further, in the case of a combination other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the off symbols (completely off symbols), so that the combination is performed in step S4011. The combination of the time off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the completely off symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this process is completed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 29, the hold process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG. 33.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the downward fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is not stored on hold, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the upper fluctuation hold counter Nd is subtracted by 1.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is reserved and stored, the first variation display is digested. There is nothing. That is, when the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is held and stored in the second hold information storage area, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first fluctuation display is not sent. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in step S4202, by determining whether or not the value of the lower fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than "0", the fluctuation pattern command is displayed as the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. It is determined which fluctuation information is possessed. Of course, the fluctuation pattern command is provided with information on which of the fluctuation information of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display is supported, and the fluctuation pattern command is based on the fluctuation pattern command and the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. It may be determined which fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is possessed.

After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 1st hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is the hold 1st area. → Execution area, Hold 2nd area → Hold 1st area, Hold 3rd area → Hold 2nd area, Hold 4th area → Hold 3rd area, and so on.

In the following step S4205, one of the lit first hold lamps 46a (for example, the rightmost one of the lit first hold lamps 46a) is turned off. After step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4209.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, when even one fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is held and stored, the value of the lower fluctuation holding counter Ne is subtracted by 1 in step S4206.

In the following step S4207, a process of shifting the data stored in the second reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the second hold information storage area in order to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas in order from the hold 1st area to the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the hold information storage area is one, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the data. When it is done, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

In the following step S4208, one of the lit second hold lamps 46b (for example, the rightmost of the lit second hold lamps 46b) is turned off. After step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

In step S4209, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting process of step S4209, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107) of the execution area of the hold information storage area is on, and if negative, the continuous notice is determined. Is not performed, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative judgment is made, based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, what kind is it if it is a big hit, what is the reach type if it is not a big hit, and so on. , Refer to the corresponding table to determine the type of continuous notice. The continuous notice of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing at the time of the corresponding fluctuation display. After step S4209, this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display. Therefore, when a continuous notice is given for a plurality of first variation displays, the first variation is displayed. If there is a ball entering the lower winning opening 33b during the variable display of the display, the second variable display may interrupt between the plurality of first variable displays, and the continuous advance notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect used as the continuous notice is a display effect that can be derived even in the case of a normal variable display when the continuous advance is not performed (an effect that can be derived for a single variable display). Is used. Therefore, even if the continuous notice is interrupted, no discomfort occurs.

Returning to the description of FIG. 29, the display setting process is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol, and the like, and determines the display pattern and the like. Then, control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command is performed.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is designed in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses. The variable display of is continued.

Further, when starting the fluctuation display, when the continuous notice flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4105) is on, each situation is based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. By referring to the table corresponding to, the type of continuous advance notice to be derived to the variable display is determined, the derivation of the advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice is determined, and the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 is performed. do. Further, in the display setting process of step S3907, a process of performing effect control during a jackpot (big hit display process) is also performed, which will be described later.

In the lamp setting process of step S3908, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illumination is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

In the voice setting process of step S3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S3909.

In step S3910, other processing such as control setting of the customer waiting effect (for example, the demonstration screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in the state where the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not performed) is performed. conduct.

In step 3911, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents of steps S3905 to 3910 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3911 performed every 2 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3912, and whether or not the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. To determine. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

If the power failure occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3913, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3912 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, the power-off process is executed in step S3914. In the power off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted. After executing the power off processing, the processing loops infinitely.

Next, the jackpot display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, for the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds, based on the information included in the opening command, if it is "16RS", "16" is set. Set, and if it is "7RS" or "7RN", set "7".

After that, in step S4703, the opening effect is set for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the setting of the lighting mode of various lamps), and then this process is terminated. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various production modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding production is selected by referring to the table. And it will be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an interval command has been received in step S4704. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, the present process ends after setting the effect during the round for a maximum of 30 seconds in step S4705.

If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether or not an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is subtracted by 1 in step S4707, the effect during the 4-second interval is set in step S4708, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received in step S4709. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is subtracted by 1 in step S4710, the ending effect of 10 seconds is set in step S4711, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received in step S4712. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713, the ending display is immediately terminated, and a setting is made so that the mode is in the normal gaming state in which the variable display is performed. After that, this process ends.

By the way, in this embodiment, various effects are performed by using the effect button unit 120 and the motion detection unit 451. Hereinafter, processing related to the effect button unit 120 and the motion detection unit 451 will be described.

First, the additional effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 40. The additional effect setting process is executed in the display setting process (step S3907) of the normal process (FIG. 29) of the sub control device 262.

First, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S7101, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, in step S7102, it is determined whether or not a jackpot state occurs based on a fluctuation pattern command or the like. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, it is determined in step S7103 whether or not the value of the action effect counter is "0 to 4". Here, the "action effect" is an effect using the motion detection unit 451. The action effect counter is, for example, added by 1 in order in the range of "0 to 9", and after reaching the upper limit value. , A loop counter that returns to the lower limit. Further, the action effect counter is updated periodically, and the value of the action effect counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (action effect counter buffer) each time the update is performed. In this step S7103, it is determined whether or not the value of the action effect counter buffer stored in the action effect counter buffer is “0 to 4”.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S7103, the value of the action selection counter is acquired in step S7104, and the group of the action effect pattern is determined with reference to the first action group selection table. Here, the action selection counter is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of "0 to 39", reaches the upper limit value, and then returns to the lower limit value. In addition, the action selection counter is updated periodically, and the value of the action selection counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (action selection counter buffer) each time it is updated.

Further, the first action group selection table is a table that is referred to when the action effect is executed at the time of a big hit or in the probability change mode, and as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the action selection counter of the action selection counter. The value and the group of action effect patterns are associated with each other. That is, the action effect pattern is determined by the combination of the detections of the motion detection units 451 (motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2), and in step S7104, the action effect pattern is determined. Instead of deciding itself, decide how many combinations of motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 should be reflected in the action effect (effective detection as an element that determines the action effect pattern). (Determine the number of detection inputs). Then, in this step S7104, the group of the action effect pattern is determined with reference to the first action group selection table based on the value of the action selection counter stored in the action selection counter buffer.

When referring to the first action group selection table, if the value of the action selection counter is "38, 39, 0", the detection signals by the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are 2 It accepts up to the count, and detection beyond that is invalid (the maximum number of detection inputs is 2 counts). Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the combination of the two motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 detected at the time of the action effect is executed, but the control is performed. In order to simplify the above, not all combinations of detections of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are stored in association with the effect, and can be input as a detection signal. The motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are limited to some extent (for example, all of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 arranged along the window 101). Combination from 6).

If the value of the action selection counter is "32 to 37", the upper limit of detection input is 3 counts, and if the value of the action selection counter is "12 to 21", the upper limit of detection input is 4 counts. .. Further, if the value of the action selection counter is "22 to 31", the upper limit of detection input is 3 counts, and if the value of the action selection counter is "2 to 11", the upper limit of detection input is 4 counts. However, in these patterns, the effect button 125 is further projected (the main body portion 405 is displaced to the projecting position) when the timing for operating the effect button 125 is reached. In addition, if the value of the action selection counter is "1", the upper limit of the number of detection inputs is 5 counts. In this case, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 The order (combination) of detection is navigated by the three-color LED 452 of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the motion detection unit 451.

In the action effect, the higher the maximum number of detection inputs, the higher the expectation for the jackpot. In addition, navigation in the action effect is performed only when the jackpot is finally taught with a special effect, and when the first action group selection table is referred to, other than 5 counts. It can also occur in some cases.

After step S7104, the action effect flag is turned on in step S7105, and the action input counter is set in step S7106. Here, the action effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the action effect. Further, the action input counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of times up to the upper limit number of detection inputs, and here, the upper limit number of detection inputs determined by referring to the first action group selection table is set.

By the way, when the "action effect" is executed, the decorative symbol display device 42 is instructed to start the action effect, and the pose desired by the player and a more detailed explanation, that is, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, and Since there is a frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2, guidance is displayed asking you to bring your hand closer to it. At this time, by making the three-color LED 452 emit light, the locations of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 can be easily recognized. Then, until the set upper limit number of detection inputs is reached, the corresponding display (display of the pose corresponding to the sensor detection) is displayed each time the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are detected. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays an instruction regarding the next operation. When the detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 reaches the upper limit number of detection inputs, the operation guidance to the effect button 125 is displayed, and the player operates the effect button 125. , The effect corresponding to the combination of the detections of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is executed (for example, the result of the lottery is taught with a predetermined effect). ..

If a negative determination is made in step S7103, it is determined in step S7107 whether or not the value of the button effect counter is any of "0 to 39". Here, the button effect counter is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order in the range of "0 to 59", reaches the upper limit value, and then returns to the lower limit value, and is periodically updated and updated. Each time, the value of the button effect counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (button effect counter buffer).

If a negative determination is made in step S7107, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7107, in step S7108, the button effect pattern is determined with reference to the first button effect selection table based on the value of the button effect counter stored in the button effect counter buffer. do. Here, the first button effect selection table is a table that is referred to when the button effect is executed at the time of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the value of the button effect counter and the button effect. The pattern is associated with it.

More specifically, when the value of the button effect counter is "2 to 17", the effect button 125 is projected at the start of the valid period in which the operation input of the effect button 125 is valid (the main body 405 is set to the protruding position). (Displace), and set the three-color LED 414 built in the effect button 125 to emit white light. When the value of the button effect counter is "18 to 25", the effect button 125 is projected at the start of the valid period, and the effect button 125 is set to emit red light. When the value of the button effect counter is "26 to 31", the effect button 125 is set to emit white light at the start of the valid period (the effect button 125 is not projected). When the value of the button effect counter is "32 to 36", the effect button 125 is set to emit red light at the start of the valid period (the effect button 125 is not projected).

When the value of the button effect counter is "37, 38", the effect button 125 is made to emit white light at the start of the valid period, and the effect button is detected by both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. Make settings to make 125 emit red light (change the emission color). Further, when the value of the button effect counter is "39", the effect button 125 is made to emit red light at the start of the valid period, and the effect button 125 is pressed by both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. Make settings to make the light emit rainbow colors.

When the value of the button effect counter is "0", the effect button 125 is made to emit white light at the start of the valid period, and the effect button 125 is pressed by both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. Make settings for immersion (displace the main body 405 to the immersion position). When the value of the button effect counter is "1", the effect button 125 is made to emit white light at the start of the valid period, and after the operation of the operation unit 406 is detected by the operation detection sensor 427, the player presses the effect button 125. When the hand is released and the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are no longer detected, the effect button 125 is set to protrude and emit light in rainbow colors.

In the following step S7109, the corresponding one of the first to third button effect flags indicating that the button effect is to be executed is set to ON. That is, in the case of a pattern in which the mode of the effect button 125 is changed by the detection of the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 (the effect button 125 is discolored or immersed), the second button effect flag is set. The third button effect flag is set in the case of a pattern in which the effect button 125 is projected after the player operates the effect button 125, and the first button effect flag is set in the case of other patterns.

Further, in step S7106 or step S7110 which shifts after step S7109, the valid preparation flag is set to ON. Here, the effective preparation flag is a flag indicating that the detection (input) of the motion detection unit 451 or the effect button 125 is in the previous stage of the valid period for which the detection (input) is valid. In the following step S7111, the validity period control timer is set. Here, the valid period control timer is a timer used for time control of the valid period, and in step S7111, a value corresponding to the time from the start of the variable display to the start of the valid period is set.

Further, in step S7112 after step S7111, it is determined whether or not the value of the air effect counter is any of "0 to 19". Here, the air effect counter is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of "0 to 49", reaches the upper limit value, and then returns to the lower limit value. Further, the air effect counter is updated periodically, and the value of the action selection counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (air effect selection counter buffer) each time the update is performed. In step S7112, it is determined whether or not the value of the air effect counter stored in the air effect selection counter buffer is "0 to 19".

If a negative determination is made in step S7112, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7112, in step S7113, the air effect pattern is determined with reference to the air effect table based on the value of the air effect counter stored in the air effect selection counter buffer. Here, the air effect selection table is a table that is referred to when the air effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 48, the value of the air effect counter and the air effect pattern are associated with each other.

More specifically, when the value of the air effect counter is "4, 5", the air discharged from the effect button 125 in the Y-shaped pipe 435 of the exhaust passage 432 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The opening degree of the first valve 438 provided in the first passage 436 is set to 0% (completely closed), and the second passage 437 provided in the second passage 437 guides the air discharged from the effect button 125 to the handle 18. The opening degree of the valve 439 is set to 100% (completely open). In this case, when the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 is operated, almost 100% of the air extruded from the effect button 125 is supplied to the handle 18, and the ventilation holes 18b formed on the front side of the handle 18 are formed. It will be blown out. In the present embodiment, the air effect may be executed only when it is taught that the jackpot is a big hit or that the mode is a probability variation mode.

When the value of the air effect counter is "6, 7", the opening degree of the first valve 438 is set to 50%, and the opening degree of the second valve 439 is set to 50%. When the value of the air effect counter is "8 to 11", the opening degree of the first valve 438 is 70%, and the opening degree of the second valve 439 is 30%. When the value of the air effect counter is "12 to 19", the opening degree of the first valve 438 is 90%, and the opening degree of the second valve 439 is 10%. As a matter of course, if the opening degree of the second valve 439 is small, the amount of air blown from the handle 18 based on the operation of the effect button 125 is also small, and it becomes difficult to notice.

Further, when the value of the air effect counter is "2, 3", the opening degree of the first valve 438 is set to 100%, the opening degree of the second valve 439 is set to 0%, and the air pump 440 is set to "weak" strength. Now drive continuously. In this way, when the second valve 439 is closed and the air pump 440 is driven, air is sent to the inside of the effect button 125 (main body portion 405) to increase the air pressure. If the operation unit 406 is pressed in this state, the air pressure inside the main body unit 405 is higher than usual, so a larger force than usual is required to displace the operation unit 406 toward the operation position. .. In other words, as a player, the operation of the effect button 125 feels "harder" than usual, and from such a sense of incongruity, it is possible to unknowingly associate that something unusual, and by extension, a jackpot state occurs.

When the value of the air effect counter is "1", the opening degree of the first valve 438 is set to 100%, the opening degree of the second valve 439 is set to 0%, and the air pump 440 is set to "weak" strength. Drive intermittently. In this case, when the player presses the operation unit 406, the operation unit 406 feels as if it is vibrating in a bumpy manner. It should be noted that the operation unit 406 may be configured so that it can be recognized that the operation unit 406 is vibrating up and down when the effect button 125 is viewed closely without touching it.

In addition, when the value of the air effect counter is "0", the opening degree of the first valve 438 is set to 100%, the opening degree of the second valve 439 is set to 100%, and the air pump 440 is set to "strong" strength. Drive continuously with. In this case, the wind blows vigorously from the handle 18, and when the effect button 125 is operated, the operation unit 406 becomes so hard that it is difficult to push it.

After step S7113, in step S7114, the air effect flag indicating that the air effect is to be executed is set to be turned on, and then this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7102, in step S7115, it is determined whether or not a front-back deviation reach occurs based on a fluctuation pattern command or the like. If a negative determination is made in step S7115, that is, if it is neither a big hit nor a front-back out-of-reach, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7115, in step S7116, it is determined whether or not the value of the action effect counter buffer stored in the action effect counter buffer is "0, 1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7116, in step S7117, a group of action effect patterns is determined with reference to the second action group selection table based on the value of the action selection counter stored in the action selection counter buffer. Here, the second action group selection table is a table that is referred to when the action effect is executed at the time of disconnection, the time reduction mode, or the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), if the value of the action selection counter is "25 to 39", the upper limit of the number of detection inputs is 2 counts, and the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are used. When the detection signal is received up to 2 counts, the detection beyond that is invalidated.

If the value of the action selection counter is "10 to 24", the upper limit of detection input is 3 counts, and if the value of the action selection counter is "1 to 5", the upper limit of detection input is 4 counts. .. Further, if the value of the action selection counter is "6 to 9", the upper limit of detection input is 3 counts, and if the value of the action selection counter is "0", the upper limit of detection input is 4 counts. However, in these patterns, the number of detections by the motion detection unit 451 (motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2) reaches the upper limit of detection inputs, and the timing of operating the effect button 125 is changed. When it arrives, the effect button 125 protrudes (the main body 405 is displaced to the protruding position).

After step S7117, in step S7118, the action effect flag is turned on, and in step S7119, the upper limit number of detection inputs determined by referring to the second action group selection table is input to the action input counter.

Further, in step S7120, the valid preparation flag is turned on, the valid period control timer is set to the time until the start of the effect in step S7121, and then this process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S7116, it is determined in step S7122 whether or not the value of the button effect counter stored in the button effect counter buffer is any of "0 to 19". If a negative determination is made in step S7122, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7122, in step S7123, the button effect pattern is determined with reference to the second button effect selection table based on the value of the button effect counter stored in the button effect counter buffer. do. Here, the second button effect selection table is a table that is referred to when the button effect is executed at the time of disconnection, and as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the value of the button effect counter and the button effect. The pattern is associated with it.

More specifically, when the value of the button effect counter is "0 to 4", the effect button 125 is projected at the start of the valid period in which the operation input of the effect button 125 is valid (the main body 405 is set to the protruding position). (Displace), and set the three-color LED 414 built in the effect button 125 to emit white light. When the value of the button effect counter is "5", the effect button 125 is projected at the start of the valid period, and the effect button 125 is set to emit red light. When the value of the button effect counter is "6 to 12", the effect button 125 is set to emit red light (the effect button 125 is not projected). When the value of the button effect counter is "13 to 18", the effect button 125 is set to emit white light at the start of the valid period (the effect button 125 is not projected). When the value of the button effect counter is "19", the effect button 125 is made to emit white light at the start of the valid period, and the effect button 125 is pressed by both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. Make settings to emit red light (change the emission color).

After that, in step S7124, in the case of a pattern (discoloring the effect button 125) accompanied by a mode change of the effect button 125 due to detection by the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, the second button effect flag is set. In the case of other patterns, the first button effect flag is set. Subsequently, this process ends through step S7120 (turning on the valid preparation flag) and step S7121 (setting of the valid period control timer).

Next, the validity period preparation process will be described with reference to FIG. 41. The validity period preparation process is executed in the normal process of the sub control device 262 (for example, every 2 msec). In step S7201, it is determined whether or not the valid preparation flag is set to ON. By the way, the effective preparation flag is set on when the execution of the action effect or the button effect is determined in the additional effect setting process. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, it is determined in step S7202 whether or not the value of the validity period control timer is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S7202, the value of the validity period control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S7203, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7202, the valid preparation flag is turned off in step S7204. In the following step S7205, it is determined whether or not the action effect flag is set to ON. When a negative determination is made in step S7205, that is, when a button effect is performed, the validity period flag indicating that the operation of the effect button 125 is a valid period is set to be turned on in step S7206, and in step S7207. Set the value corresponding to the length of the validity period in the validity period control timer. After that, in step S7208, the button effect of the pattern set by referring to the first or second button effect selection table (see FIG. 47) is started, and in step S7209, the button input guidance for prompting the operation of the effect button 125 is performed. After setting (for example, display on the decorative symbol display device 42, voice announcement, etc.), this process ends.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7205, that is, when an action effect is performed, the motion detection unit 451 (motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and frame side proximity detection sensor AE2) is detected in step S7210. Turn on the action reception flag that indicates that the action input period is valid as an element that determines the action effect pattern. In the following step S7211, a value corresponding to the length of the action input period is set for the validity period control timer.

Further, in step S7212, the action effect of the pattern set by referring to the first or second action group selection table (see FIG. 45) is started, and in step S7213, the action input guidance for prompting the operation of the effect button 125 is performed. (For example, display on the decorative symbol display device 42, light emission of the three-color LED 452 corresponding to the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, voice announcement, etc.), and then perform this process. finish.

In the action effect in the present embodiment, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity sensor AE2 are used among the motion detection units 451. Further, in the action effect, all of these motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity sensor AE2 do not always accept the detection input, but the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity sensor AE2. Among the sensors AE2, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2, which are detected according to the state, are limited (the number is narrowed down to simplify control and the like). Then, in the action input guidance, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 for which the detection input is enabled and the three-color LED 452 of the frame side proximity sensor AE2 are turned on (or blinking), and the other motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10, Then, the three-color LED 452 of the frame-side proximity sensor AE2 is turned off.

Next, the action input process will be described with reference to FIG. 42. The action input process is executed in the normal process of the sub control device 262 (for example, every 2 msec). First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not the action acceptance flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7301, it is determined whether or not the validity period flag is set to ON in step S7302.

If a negative determination is made in step S7302, it is determined in step S7303 whether or not there is detection information of the motion detection unit 451 (motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and frame side proximity detection sensor AE2). If affirmative determination is made in step S7303, the value of the action input counter is subtracted by 1 in step S7304.

In the following step S7305, the detection information of the current motion detection unit 451 is stored in the action storage area as the motion storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. The action storage area includes four storage areas, a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area, and the detection information of the motion detection unit 451 is stored in the first storage area → the second storage area. Areas → 3rd storage area → 4th storage area are stored in chronological order. That is, by referring to the action storage area, it is possible to grasp the combination and order of the detections of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of detection inputs to the motion detection unit 451 at the time of action production may be 5 counts, but in this case, the combination and order of detection of the motion detection unit 451 is one pattern. The pattern is navigated. Therefore, it is sufficient to grasp the combination and order of detection of the motion detection unit 451 when the maximum number of detection inputs is 4 counts, and the action storage area has 4 storage areas.

After that, in step S7306, the effect processing corresponding to the detection of the motion detection unit 451 is performed, and then in step S7307, it is determined whether or not the value of the action input counter is "0". When the affirmative determination is made in step S7307, that is, when the number of times detected by the motion detection unit 451 in the action input period reaches the upper limit number of detection inputs, the validity period flag is turned on in step S7308, and step S7309 In step S7310, a value corresponding to the length of the valid period is set for the valid period control timer, and a button input guidance for prompting an operation to the effect button 125 is set in step S7310, and then this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S7303 or step S7307, that is, even if there is no detection information of the motion detection unit 451 or the detection information of the motion detection unit 451 is confirmed, the number of detections is set to the upper limit of the number of detection inputs. If it has not been reached, it is determined in step S7311 whether or not the value of the validity period control timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S7311, the value of the validity period control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S7312, and the action input guidance is set in step S7313, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7311, that is, if the number of detections of the motion detection unit 451 does not reach the upper limit of the number of detection inputs and the action input period of the action effect elapses, the action acceptance flag is set in step S7314. It is set to off, the action effect flag is set to off in step S7315, and the action input guidance is terminated in step S7316. Then, in step S7317, the time-up display for teaching that the action input period of the action effect has ended is set, and then this process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7302, that is, when the input operation of the effect button 125 is in the valid period during the action effect, the operation of the effect button 125 (operation detection sensor 427) is performed in step S7318. (Detection) is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7318, in step S7319, an action result effect that teaches the end of the action effect is determined based on the detection information stored in the action storage area and the information on whether or not it is a big hit. And perform the process of deriving.

In the present embodiment, the combination and order of the detections of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2, which are the detection information stored in the action storage area, and the order and the pattern of the action result production. An action pattern determination table showing the correspondence is provided. For example, when the upper limit of the number of detection inputs is 4 counts, the pattern of the action result effect is determined by referring to the action pattern determination table as shown in FIG. That is, when the value of the action input counter is "4" and the detection information is not yet stored in the action storage area, the three-color LED 452 of the motion detection sensors ME1, ME2, ME3, and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2. Is turned on, and in the decorative symbol display device 42, an action input guidance for prompting the user to hold his / her hand over the sensor is performed (step S7213 of the validity period preparation process).

Then, for example, when the motion detection sensor ME1 is detected, the detection information is stored in the first storage area of the action storage area (step S7305 of the action input process), and the value of the action input counter is "3". Is subtracted from (step S7304). Further, the three-color LEDs 452 of the motion detection sensors ME2 and AE2 are turned on, and the action input guidance for prompting the decorative symbol display device 42 to hold a hand over the sensor is performed (step S7313). When the process of storing the detected information in the action storage area and the process of setting the action input guidance are repeated until the value of the action input counter becomes "0" (affirmative determination in step S7307), the effect button 125 is pressed. The operation becomes valid (step S7308). Then, when the effect button 125 is operated (affirmative determination in step S7318), the pattern of the action result effect is determined by comparing the stored contents of the action storage area with the action pattern determination table.

In addition to the action pattern determination table for 4 counts, there are two types of action pattern determination tables, one for 2 counts for the maximum number of detection inputs and the other for 3 counts for the maximum number of detection inputs, and each is a big hit. The one for use and the one for removal are prepared, and the one used in step S7319 is appropriately selected. Further, the stored contents of the action storage area will be deleted at the end of setting the action result effect in step S7319. In addition, the table configuration of the action pattern determination table is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model.

After step S7319, the action acceptance flag is set to off in step S7320, the validity period flag is set to off in step S7321, and the action effect flag is set to off in step S7322. Then, after ending the button input guidance in step S7323, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7318, it is determined in step S7324 whether or not the value of the validity period control timer is "0". After subtracting 1 from the value of the validity period control timer in step S7325, this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7324, that is, if there is no operation on the effect button 125 during the effective period in the action effect and the effective period has elapsed, the effective period of the action effect ends in step S7326. After setting the time-up display that teaches what has been done, this process ends.

Although not specifically mentioned in this embodiment, in order to improve the convenience of the player who does not want to participate in the action production, the action reception flag is set to on and the validity period flag is set to off. It is configured so that the value of the validity period control timer is predeterminedly subtracted when the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, or based on the storage information of the action storage area at the time when the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed. The action result effect setting (process of step S7319 or lower) may be performed. In the present embodiment, the function of turning on / off the action reception flag (step S7210, step S7314, step S7320) constitutes the operation input state switching means.

Next, the button effect execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 43. The button effect execution process is executed in the normal process of the sub control device 262 (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not the validity period flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, it is determined in step S7402 whether or not any of the first to third button effect flags is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, or if a negative determination is made in step S7402, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7402, that is, when the button effect is in progress, the distance monitoring flag for executing the button effect when the third button effect flag is set to be turned on is turned on in step S7403. Determine if it is set. If a negative determination is made in step S7403, it is determined in step S7404 whether or not there is an operation of the effect button 125 (detection of the operation detection sensor 427). When the affirmative determination is made in step S7404, it is determined whether or not the third button effect flag is set to ON in step S7405.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7405, the separation monitoring flag is set to ON in step S7406, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7405, the first button effect flag is turned off in step S7407.

After that, in step S7408, a process of determining and deriving an effect (result effect) according to the operation of the effect button 125 is performed based on the information on whether or not the jackpot is a big hit. The method of determining the result effect in step S7408 is not particularly limited, and the pattern of the button effect may or may not be added. For example, the loop counter that is updated at a predetermined timing and the jackpot and miss tables that store the correspondence between the loop counter value and the effect pattern may be used to determine the result effect. ..

In the following step S7409, the validity period flag is set to off, the button input guidance is terminated in step S7410, and then this process is terminated.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7404, that is, if the sparseness of the effect button 125 is not confirmed, it is determined whether or not the second button effect flag is set to ON in step S7411. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7411, it is determined whether or not both the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are detected in step S7412.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7412, a process of executing a proximity correspondence effect (see FIG. 47) corresponding to proximity detection is performed in step S7413. That is, when the effect button 125 is immersed, the stepping motor 407 of the effect button 125 is driven to displace the main body 405 downward to the immersion position as shown in FIG. 39. As a result, even though the player has not yet operated the operation unit 406, the operation surface of the operation unit 406 is accommodated below the upper surface of the mounting base 403 (so that it is substantially flush with each other in this example). Will be done.

Further, when the emission color of the effect button 125 is changed, a signal corresponding to the LED board 413 of the effect button 125 is output. In the present embodiment, the button effect and the like are performed in conjunction with the display effect on the decorative symbol display device 42. In particular, when a pattern for changing the emission color of the effect button 125 is selected, the unit-side proximity detection sensor With the detection of both the AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2, a display suggesting the result of the display effect on the decorative symbol display device 42 is derived. For example, in the effect of the character performing a predetermined challenge on the decorative symbol display device 42, the success expectation of the challenge is suggested around the character at the timing when the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are detected. An aura with which colors and sizes are associated with each other may be displayed, or a cut-in image of a character may be displayed. This suggests what happens to the result of the button operation immediately before the effect button 125 is operated, so that the effect at the time of announcing the result of the button operation can be enjoyed in two stages. In addition, the timing of the effect is not determined by the pachinko machine 10 side, but is derived at the timing when the proximity of the player's hand is detected. Therefore, the timing of the effect is an uplifting feeling of the player. It is possible to suppress a situation such as deviation.

After that, in step S7414, the second button effect flag is set to off. In the present embodiment, by performing the proximity-corresponding effect, the process proceeds as if the effect button 125 was operated regardless of whether or not the operation detection sensor 427 was detected. After step S7414, in step S7408, a process for determining and deriving the result effect is performed, in step S7409, the validity period flag is set to off, and in step S7410, the button input guidance is terminated, and then this process is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S7411 or step S7412, it is determined in step S7415 whether or not the value of the validity period control timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S7415, the value of the validity period control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S7416, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7415, the on-set first to third button effect flags are set to off in step S7417, and the valid period of the operation of the effect button 125 ends in step S7418. Set the time-up display to indicate that. After that, the validity period flag is set to off in step S7409, the button input guidance is terminated in step S7410, and then this process is terminated.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7403, that is, when the effect button 125 is operated with the third button effect flag turned on, in step S7419, the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity are approached. It is determined whether or not detection is being performed on either of the detection sensors AE2. That is, after the player operates the effect button 125, the hand operating the effect button 125 does not detect the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 from the effect button 125. Determine if they are separated. If a negative determination is made in step S7319, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7419, in step S7420, a process of executing a button protrusion effect for projecting the effect button 125 is performed. That is, the stepping motor 407 of the effect button 125 is driven, and as shown in FIG. 38, the main body portion 405 is displaced upward to the protruding position. As a result, when the player releases the operation unit 406, the operation unit 406 protrudes more than the operation unit 406, or when the player thinks that the operation unit 406 is released, the operation unit 406 sticks to the hand. Will be derived.

After that, in step S7421, the third button effect flag is set to off. In the present embodiment, by performing the button protrusion effect, the process proceeds as if the effect button 125 was operated regardless of the presence or absence of detection by the operation detection sensor 427. After step S7421, in step S7408, a process for determining and deriving the result effect is performed, in step S7409, the validity period flag is set to off, and in step S7410, the button input guidance is terminated, and then this process is terminated.

The process of confirming the normal operation of the effect button 125 is performed separately from the action input process and the button effect execution process, and when the operation detection sensor 427 is detected, a process corresponding to the situation is appropriately taken. Is executed, but when the action acceptance flag or the button effect flag is set to ON, the corresponding process is not executed in the normal operation confirmation process, and the action input process or the button effect execution process is performed. I will leave it to you.

Further, in the present embodiment, statistics on how to operate the effect button 125 are obtained. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation speed measurement that measures the time from the detection of both the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 to the detection of the operation detection sensor 427 during the valid period. An approach speed measurement timer as a means and an operation time measurement timer for measuring the time continuously detected by the operation detection sensor 427 are provided. Further, as the operation preference counting means, a high-speed operation counter that adds 1 when the measurement time of the approach speed measurement timer is, for example, less than 0.1 seconds, and 1 addition when the measurement time is, for example, 1 second or more. A low-speed operation counter is provided. Further, a long press operation counter is provided in which the measurement time of the operation time measurement timer is incremented by 1 when the measurement time of the operation time measurement timer is, for example, 0.5 seconds or more during the valid period.

Then, the method of determining the result effect (the pattern of the selected result effect) performed in response to the operation of the effect button 125 changes according to the values of the high-speed operation counter, the low-speed operation counter, and the long-press operation counter. It is configured to get. For example, the start timing of the result effect is usually the time when the operation detection sensor 427 is detected, but when the value of the long press operation counter is equal to or more than the specified value, the start timing of the result effect is the operation detection sensor. It may be configured so as to be the time when the detection of 427 is stopped. When the value of the low-speed operation counter is equal to or higher than the specified value, the value of the low-speed operation counter is 1 when the first button effect selection table (see FIG. 47 (a)) is referred to (when it becomes a big hit). At the time of addition (when a predetermined time elapses after the player's hand starts waiting directly above the effect button 125), the emission color of the effect button 125 is easily changed to red or rainbow. Or, at the timing when the value of the low-speed operation counter is added by 1, the effect button 125 protrudes and performs a displacement operation such that the effect button 125 comes into contact with the player's hand, or the value of the low-speed operation counter changes. When the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are no longer detected without pressing the effect button 125 despite the addition of 1, the corresponding effect may be derived. Further, for example, when an effect that fails when the effect button 125 is operated is generated once, but there is a revival effect that turns to success after that, when the value of the high-speed operation counter is equal to or higher than the specified value, While the selection ratio of the revival effect is reduced, the final result may be easily displayed by one operation of the effect button 125. Further, in order to protect the effect button 125, for example, when the measurement time of the approach speed measurement timer is less than 0.1 second, a warning may be announced (display such as "Please operate gently"). .. Furthermore, if the value of the high-speed operation counter (which may be the value obtained by subtracting the value of the low-speed operation counter from the value of the high-speed operation counter) exceeds the specified value, or as the number increases after exceeding the specified value, a predetermined penalty is imposed. (The probability of occurrence of the effect itself using the effect button 125 is reduced, etc.) may be implemented.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game such as the number of big hits and the number of fluctuations is performed between the pachinko machine 10 and the server of the game machine manufacturer or the like via a mobile communication terminal (mobile phone, smartphone, etc.) carried by the player. Data can be exchanged. Then, at the end of the game, the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10 is read by the mobile communication terminal to access the server, so that the game data and the server are stored. There is. Further, the two-dimensional code also includes information indicating the values of the high-speed operation counter, the low-speed operation counter, and the long-press operation counter, and the values of the counters are stored in the server. Further, the password issued by the server includes not only the information based on the game information but also the cumulative information of the values of the high-speed operation counter, the low-speed operation counter, and the long-press operation counter, and the password is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10. By inputting, it is possible to perform an effect according to the cumulative information of the counter.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this example, when the power is turned off, the values of the high-speed operation counter, the low-speed operation counter, and the long-press operation counter are erased, but when the two-dimensional code is displayed. It may be configured to be erased with. Further, the above-mentioned various effects may be configured so that the values of the high-speed operation counter, the low-speed operation counter, and the long-press operation counter can be performed other than when the predetermined conditions are satisfied. For example, in a part of the case where a big hit state occurs, the decorative symbol display device 42 provides guidance for prompting the operation of the effect button, and the player's hand or the like close to the effect button 125 approaches the unit side accordingly. When at least one of the detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 is detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 provides guidance to wait for the operation of the effect button 125, and is above the effect button 125 (unit-side proximity detection sensor). Even if the operation unit 406 protrudes and emits light when the player's hand or the like is on standby for a predetermined time in the area detected by at least one of the AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2), it is possible to execute the effect. good.

Next, the air effect execution process will be described with reference to FIG. The air effect execution process is executed in the normal process of the sub control device 262 (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step S7501, it is determined whether or not the validity period flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7501, it is determined whether or not the air effect flag is set to ON in step S7502. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, it is determined whether or not both the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are detected in step S7503. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7503, in step S7504, the set air effect is started with reference to the air effect selection table (FIG. 48), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7501, step S7502, and step S7503, the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the configurations related to the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME10 will be described. In the present embodiment, the input detection to the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME10 provided on the game board 30 is effective in the jackpot state and the probability change mode (excluding the reach state). That is, in the present embodiment, the character displayed by the decorative symbol display device 42 performs (reacts) the operation according to the detection by the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME10 in the jackpot state and the probability variation mode. ing. For example, if the motion detection sensor ME8 → ME10 → ME9 is detected within a predetermined time, the character will rotate around, or if the motion detection sensor ME9 continues to detect for a predetermined time or longer, the left side of the screen will appear. The motion detection sensor ME8 corresponds to the right passage, the motion detection sensor ME9 corresponds to the left passage, and the motion detection sensor ME10 corresponds to the passage in the back passage, for example, when a character approaches or comes to play in a huge maze. However, the result may be displayed according to the selection when the selection is made three times.

Next, the configurations related to the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7 will be described. In the present embodiment, a game card having a balance is inserted or a bill is inserted in a card unit as a game assist device arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, and the inserted game ball If the return button 122 is operated with a balance, the game card with a balance is ejected from the card unit. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control device 262 is configured so that it can be grasped that a game card having a balance is inserted in the card unit. That is, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with a balance storage area that can store the balance of the game card, and when the game card is inserted, a value corresponding to the balance is set with respect to the balance storage area via the external terminal plate 240 or the like. When it is stored and lent by operating the ball lending button 121, a value corresponding to the rented amount is subtracted from the balance storage area. In addition, when a card unit with a balance is ejected from the card unit, the value in the balance storage area is cleared.

Then, in the present embodiment, there is detection of the motion detection sensor ME6 provided on the right side of the handle 18 and the motion detection sensor ME7 provided between the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 at predetermined time intervals. If it is determined whether or not both are detected, that is, if it is determined that the player has left the seat, the balance storage area is referred to to see if there is a balance of the game card. When it is confirmed whether or not the game card is affirmative and affirmatively determined, the decorative symbol display device 42 or voice is used to notify that the game card has been forgotten to be removed. In the present embodiment, the balance storage area, the function of storing the balance in the balance storage area, and the function of confirming the balance storage area when the player's departure is detected constitute the forgotten item detection means.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the player's absence is confirmed by the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display is in progress. Even if it is immediately after the stop display of the fluctuation display and the next fluctuation display has not been started yet, if there is a pending fluctuation display, it is considered that the fluctuation display is in progress. .. If an affirmative judgment is made in such a judgment, the state of the variable display is maintained as it is from the time when the player's departure is confirmed (the variable display is not stopped and displayed, or / and the variable display is displayed. (Pauses the production that accompanies). On the other hand, when the player's seating is confirmed by the detection of the motion detection unit 451 (the operation of the handle 18 is also possible) (for example, when the detection information (for a predetermined time or longer) by the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7 is input. Alternatively, after the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7 are detected, the variable display is restarted (in a state of progress) when it is confirmed that the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7 may be restarted by operating the effect button 125 or the like. Has been done.

The action effect and the button effect may be executed even in the jackpot state, the probability change mode, and the time reduction mode. That is, although it is actually a probability variation jackpot, the decorative symbol display device 42 has been taught that it is not possible to determine whether the jackpot is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot during variable display (even-numbered doublets are displayed). If the derivation of the button effect of the pattern that succeeds during the jackpot state is decided, the probability change jackpot can be obtained by participating in the button effect (operating the effect button 125). Be taught. Further, although it is actually a probabilistic mode, it is taught that the decorative symbol display device 42 is taught a jackpot, and that a probabilistic mode is given during a variable display or a jackpot state (it is a probabilistic jackpot). Even if there is no such case, if it is decided to derive an action effect of a pattern that apparently succeeds in the time reduction mode, it is taught that the mode is a probability variation mode by participating in the action effect. Of course, if you do not participate in these button effects and action effects, you will lose the opportunity to be taught that you are in a probabilistic jackpot or probabilistic mode by the button effects or action effects.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 capable of detecting the hand of a player who is trying to operate the effect button 125 and is close to the effect button 125 at a position near the effect button 125 and A frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to detect in advance that there is an operation on the effect button 125, and it is possible to perform an effect using that information. For example, based on the detection by the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2, an effect related to the effect performed when the effect button 125 is operated is performed before the effect button 125 is operated. Alternatively, the mode of the effect button 125 itself can be changed (see step S7413 of the button effect execution process and step S7504 of the air effect execution process). Therefore, it is possible to add novel fun to the operation of the effect button 125 and to diversify the effect and playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, based on the detection information of the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1, the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2, and the operation detection sensor 427, the effect button 125 is not operated, but the player's hand is present near the effect button 125. It is possible to grasp that and reflect that information in the production. In this example, the measurement time of the approach speed measurement timer that measures the time from the detection of both the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 to the detection of the operation detection sensor 427 is 0. A high-speed operation counter that adds 1 when it is less than 1 second and a low-speed operation counter that adds 1 when it is 1 second or more are provided, and such a count, that is, according to the taste and taste of the player. The production can be derived.

For example, when the value of the low-speed operation counter is equal to or higher than the specified value and the occurrence of the jackpot state is determined, a predetermined time elapses after the player's hand starts waiting directly above the effect button 125. Then, when the emission color of the effect button 125 is changed to red or rainbow color, or when the value of the low-speed operation counter is added by 1, the effect button 125 protrudes and goes into contact with the player's hand from the effect button 125 side. When such an effect is performed, or when the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are no longer detected without pressing the effect button 125 even though the value of the low-speed operation counter is added by 1. It is possible to derive the corresponding effect. Therefore, the player can realize that such a notification effect is derived (reflected) because of his / her own operation, and can obtain a further sense of fulfillment and accomplishment. As a result, the above-mentioned effects such as directing and diversifying the playability are more reliably achieved.

Further, when the effect button 125 is operated, the mode of the effect button 125 may be changed (the emission color, the protruding length of the operation unit 406, or the force required to push the operation unit 406), or the effect button 125 may be changed. When trying to perform a pre-production that suggests the result according to the operation of, if the pachinko machine 10 arbitrarily determines the start timing of the pre-production, the timing will be the timing of the operation of the production button 125. It may be too early or too late. That is, if the timing of the pre-effect is too early, there is a concern that the player may easily notice it, or that the interval between the operation of the effect button 125 and the operation of the effect button 125 may be too wide to be excited. On the other hand, if the timing of the pre-production is too late (for example, the pre-production starts when the operation unit 406 is touched a little), there is a concern that there will be no time grace for the pre-production.

On the other hand, such a problem can be eliminated by executing the mode change shortly before the operation to the effect button 125 triggered by the detection of the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2. Therefore, the timing of the pre-effect and the button effect can be perfectly matched, and the player's feelings can be more surely enhanced by such a series of flowing effects. Further, when the button effect is derived but the player does not operate the effect button 125, it is possible to avoid unnecessary pre-effect. In particular, regarding the air effect, since it is necessary to control the opening and closing of the first valve 438 and the second valve 439 provided in the exhaust passage 432, the opening and closing control is started in advance of the operation of the effect button 125. The effect of being able to make it in time for the operation of the button 125 becomes more remarkable.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the detection of both the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 mounted upward and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 mounted forward is confirmed, the effect button 125 is pressed. It is now detected as being close to the player's hand. Therefore, it is possible to three-dimensionally detect a player's hand or the like approaching the effect button 125 in order to operate the effect button 125. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an operation of a player unrelated to the operation of the effect button 125 is detected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect button unit 120 is provided behind the storage recess 19a on the upper surface side of the upper plate 19. Therefore, when the player manually transfers the game ball from the so-called dollar box or the lower plate 15 to the upper plate 19, or takes out the game ball from the upper plate 19 when using a coffee service or the like, it takes. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the hand or the like of the player performing the operation is detected by the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1. Therefore, the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 detect an operation unrelated to the operation of the effect button 125, and extra control related to the operation of the effect button 125 is executed. It can be suppressed more reliably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the action effect is performed by using the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 provided along the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. There is. That is, having the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 detect the player's motion is an input operation for determining the pattern of the action effect (result effect indicating the end of the action effect). The combination of the detections of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 that detect the player's motion and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 and the effect according to the order are executed. For this reason, the input operation itself by the player can be made various rather than one-sided, and the production performed in response to the operation input by the player can be made more diverse, and by extension, the movement of the player. It is possible to derive an effect, and it is possible to derive an effect that makes it easier for the player to embrace emotions. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel fun to the input operation by the player, and to make the player more familiar and more versatile. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are arranged around the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 that makes the game area visible from the front. For this reason, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect by fully using the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 that utilizes an area that was conventionally only used for decoration and the like, and it is possible to provide a novel playability. ..

Furthermore, in the action effect and the button effect, not only the result of the winning / losing lottery is suggested at the time of variable display, but also the definitive teaching that the jackpot will be obtained, or the action effect or the button during the jackpot state or the probability change mode. When the effect is derived, it may be taught that it is actually a probabilistic jackpot or a probabilistic mode. In this way, by participating in the action production and the button production, it is possible to obtain an opportunity (as soon as possible, as much as possible) for the player to know the information he / she wants to know. This makes it possible to promote participation in action effects and button effects. Furthermore, since it is possible to give reasons for participating in action productions and button productions, it becomes easier for players to participate in such productions both externally and internally, which triggers the action productions and button productions themselves. You can get to know the fun of.

In addition, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 that perform action effects, the frame-side proximity detection sensors AE2, and the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME9 that perform reaction effects correspond to the detection by these sensors being enabled. A three-color LED 452 is installed so as to turn on the light or turn off the light in response to the detection. Therefore, the positions of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME9, and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 can be suggested, or the player can be made to perform a predetermined action (suggest the order of detection). It is possible to teach whether the detection is reliably performed by the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME9, and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2. Therefore, it is possible to greatly assist the player's understanding of the effect of using the motion detection unit 451.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state where a game card having a balance is inserted in the card unit attached to the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the player leaves the seat based on the detection information of the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7. When it is confirmed, the decorative symbol display device 42 or the voice notifies that the game card has been forgotten to be removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the game card. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game card is stolen when the player leaves the seat in the toilet or the like. Further, by using the detection information by the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7, a predetermined notification is performed only when the player leaves the seat. Therefore, if the game card is left inserted in the card unit, it is possible to avoid an annoying situation in which the notification state is always provided.

Further, when the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7 confirm that the player has left the seat during the fluctuation display, the state of the fluctuation display is maintained as it is. Therefore, if you want to go to the toilet or a mobile phone call during the variable display, you can leave your seat without worrying about the variable display. Therefore, the convenience can be dramatically improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect button 125, the exhaust passage 432 that communicates between the outside of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the handle 18 are provided. Then, when it is decided that the air effect is performed, when the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 is pushed down, the air extruded from the main body unit 405 is blown out from the ventilation hole 18b formed in the handle 18, or the pachinko machine 10 The air pump 440 provided in the first passage, which is a branch passage leading to the outside of the back side of the slingshot, is driven to supply the air of the effect button 125 to change the feeling of operating the effect button 125 (difficult to push in, etc.). It has become. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced, the interest of the player can be further improved, and the effect of the effect such as diversification of the effect can be achieved more reliably.

By the way, the air pump 440 is supplied with the effect button 125 to increase the magnitude of the force required to push down the operation unit 406, or the air is intermittently supplied so as to vibrate when the operation unit 406 is pushed down. If the air pump 440 is operated too early, the player may notice the change in the effect button 125, and if the air pump 440 is operated too late, the player may notice the change. There is concern that the air supply will not be in time for the operation of the player's operation unit 406. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the air pump 440 is operated at just before the operation to the operation unit 406, triggered by the detection of the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2. It is possible to eliminate such a defect.

Further, when the execution of the air effect is decided, referring to the air effect selection table shown in FIG. 48, when the value of the air effect counter is "4 to 19", the operation unit 406 is operated to produce the effect. The air pushed out from the main body 405 of the button 125 is blown out from the ventilation hole 18b of the handle 18, but when the value of the air effect counter is "0", the air supplied from the air pump 440 is blown out from the ventilation hole 18b. It will blow out. In the present embodiment, the air pump 440 is driven by the detection of the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 (steps S7503 and S7504 in FIG. 44), so that the air supplied from the air pump 440 is supplied. The timing of blowing out from the ventilation hole 18b is a little before the player operates the effect button 125. Therefore, in the configuration of this example in which the effect button 125 is often blown out from the handle 18 in response to the operation of the effect button 125, air is blown out from the handle 18 even though the player does not operate the effect button 125. I will be happy with the surprise (in this example, the wind comes out from the handle 18 only when it hits the jackpot).

The content is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(A) In the above embodiment, the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 as proximity detection means are installed in the vicinity of the effect button 125 so that the player's hand in the vicinity of the effect button 125 can be detected. However, the target operation means for installing the proximity detection means in the vicinity is not limited to the effect button 125, and the form and installation location of the operation means can be changed as appropriate. For example, the proximity detection means is configured by the motion detection sensor ME6 provided in the vicinity of the handle 18, and based on the detection of the motion detection sensor ME6, a predetermined effect (communication) is performed before the player's hand touches the handle 18. The wind may be blown out from the pores 18b, etc.). Further, for example, when a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand or the like is close to the front (glass unit 137) of the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided, the player's hand or the like close to the touch sensor is used. Proximity detection means may be installed so that it can be detected. Further, a touch panel may be provided in place of or in addition to the effect button 125, and proximity detection means may be provided corresponding to the touch panel. Further, for example, in a slot machine that uses medals as a game medium, proximity detection means is provided for a start lever, a stop button, a bet button, a production button (push button, cross button, joystick, etc.), a touch sensor, and the like. It may be placed close to each other.

In addition, in order to operate the predetermined operating means, when the place where the player's hand or the like almost passes can be specified (the trajectory of the operation approaching the predetermined operating means can be specified), the proximity detecting means is said to be the same. It may be installed at a specific place, and the proximity detecting means and the predetermined operating means may be relatively far apart from each other. For example, the sensitivity of the motion detection sensor ME5 installed at the lower left of the window portion 101 can be adjusted, and the accessory to be touched with respect to the upper center of the window portion 101 and the accessory to the accessory. A touch sensor (operating means) that detects the touch of the window is installed. That is, since the player basically operates the handle 18 with the right hand, it is considered that the touch to the accessory is generally performed by the left hand, and the left hand is swung up to the upper center portion of the window portion 101. If, it is considered that a part of the left hand, the left arm, or the like passes in front of the motion detection sensor ME5 (operates in the front). Then, when it is decided to perform a predetermined effect triggered by the touch to the accessory, guidance for urging the touch to the accessory is given, and the sensitivity of the motion detection sensor ME5 is increased. For example, a big hit state occurs. If it is determined, the motion detection sensor ME5 is used as a trigger to derive a dedicated light emitting effect by the three-color LED 452 of the motion detection unit 451 and the annular illumination unit 102. You may.

It should be noted that the farther the proximity detecting means for detecting the operation to the operating means from the target operating means is, the more accurate the accuracy is such that "the operation of approaching the operating means in an attempt to operate the operating means is detected in advance". Is reduced, that is, there is an increased possibility that other actions will be picked up. In this regard, based on the proximity detecting means and the situation at that time, for example, it is determined whether or not the operation on the operating means is in an effective operation effective state, and if an affirmative determination is made, the proximity detecting means of the proximity detecting means. Whether or not an operation approaching the operating means is detected in an attempt to operate the operating means by checking the detection status or confirming whether or not the operation is enabled when the proximity detecting means is detected. The accuracy can be improved. It is also possible to improve the accuracy (accuracy) by adopting a configuration in which an operation of approaching the operating means is confirmed by trying to operate the operating means by detection by a plurality of proximity detecting means rather than one proximity detecting means. can.

Further, in the above embodiment, the proximity detection means is composed of two sensors, but it may be composed of one sensor or three or more sensors. Further, the number and arrangement of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10 are not particularly limited. In addition, the motion detection means is not limited to sensors such as motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10, and is composed of, for example, a switch (push switch) that automatically returns to the original state even when operated. It may be that.

(B) In the above embodiment, the configuration of the effect button unit 120 is not particularly limited, and the design can be changed as appropriate. For example, the main body 405 may be configured so as not to be displaced vertically. Further, for example, a door member may be provided as an opening / closing means that closes the upper part of the effect button 125 to prevent contact. More specifically, for example, a pair of front and rear plate-shaped bodies forming a substantially fan shape, a closing panel having a substantially arc-shaped cross section connecting the substantially arc-shaped side portions of the pair of plate-shaped bodies, and each plate-shaped body. A pair of door members having a pinion portion projecting from the side surface (front surface or rear surface) of the plate-like body at a corner portion separated from the closing panel are provided with respect to the housing 404, and the pair of door members are provided by a stepping motor. It may be configured to work. In this case, the effect can be improved by protecting the effect button 125 when not in use, communicating the operation timing (validity period) of the effect button 125 in an easy-to-understand manner, and making the effect button 125 visible or invisible. It can be improved. When the door member is closed, it is desirable to displace the main body 405 to the immersion position. In this case, it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the effect button unit 120.

Further, when the door member is provided in the effect button unit 120, even if the opportunity to close the door member has come, the door member is closed in the state where the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is detected. Furthermore, if the door member is being changed to the closed state and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is detected, the closing operation may be interrupted. good. By linking the detection of the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 and the closing operation of the door member in this way, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which the player's hand is pinched by the door member.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the main body 405 is displaced up and down by the stepping motor 407, but the stepping motor 407 does not move the main body 405 up and down, but moves the operation unit 406 up and down. It may be configured so that In this case, for example, the operation unit 406 and the main body unit 405 can be integrally moved up and down according to the operation of the player, and a part of the lowered operation unit 406 or the main body unit 405 can be detected by the pressing operation. The operation detection sensor 427 may be provided as described above. Further, for example, when the stepping motor 407 (a solenoid or the like can be used as a substitute) can directly move the operation unit 406 up and down instead of the main body 405, and the operation unit 406 is pressed. , The shaft of the stepping motor 407 may be configured to be rotatable accordingly. Further, as in the latter case, when the operation unit 406 is directly displaced by a driving means such as a stepping motor 407, it is determined to immerse the operation unit 406, and the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 are detected. When this is performed, the stepping motor 407 may be configured so that the operation unit 406 can be displaced downward to a position where detection by the operation detection sensor 427 is performed. In this case, it is possible to reliably derive the effect performed when the operation unit 406 is operated (switched on). Therefore, even if the player is confused by the unexpected operation of the operation unit 406 that it retracts before touching it and the player unintentionally forgets to operate the operation unit 406, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 is surely performed. It can be derived. Further, when such a configuration is adopted, the operation detection sensor 427 is detected by driving a driving means such as a stepping motor 407, and the operation detection sensor 427 is detected by the player operating the operation unit 406. Correspondence control (selected effect) performed based on the detection of the operation detection sensor 427 when the detection is performed, that is, when the operation detection sensor 427 is detected while the stepping motor 407 is not driven. May be different. In this case, it is possible to further diversify and differentiate (weight) the production. Further, when the operation unit 406 is immersed by a driving means such as a stepping motor 407, the operation unit 406 is displaced to a position where further displacement to the immersion position side (operation position side) is restricted (bottom thrust). It may be. In addition, the immersive operation unit 406 may be entirely immersed in the upper surface of the surface (mounting base 403) of the effect button unit 120. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the operating unit 406 is struck by an excited player and the operating unit 406 is damaged.

(C) In the above embodiment, among the Y-shaped pipes 435 of the exhaust passage 432, a valve capable of adjusting the air flow rate is provided also in the passage before branching into the first passage 436 and the second passage 437. May be good. In this case, the compressed air of the air pump 440 installed in the first passage 436 can be supplied to the handle 18 side without being supplied to the effect button 125 side. In this case, the air volume that can be supplied to the handle 18 can be finely adjusted, and the effect on the handle 18 using the air pump 440 is not only performed in combination with the effect on the effect button 125 using the air pump 440, but also separately. It is possible to diversify the production.

In the above embodiment, the amount of air blown out from the ventilation holes 18b of the handle 18 is small just by pushing down the operation unit 406, and there is a concern that it may be difficult to notice. Therefore, large and small pinions, racks, etc. are interposed. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the amount of air pushed out to the ventilation hole 18b side with respect to the amount of movement of the operation unit 406 is amplified.

Further, the effect button 125 (operation unit 406) may be configured to be projectable by using the compressed air of the air pump 440. For example, in a state where the operation unit 406 is not operated, the operation unit 406 is held by the coil spring 424 at a position where it can be displaced both upward and downward, and air is relatively strongly discharged from the air pump 440. By being supplied, the operation unit 406 may be configured to be lifted upward. In this case, the operation unit 406 can be projected relatively quickly as compared with the case where the stepping motor 407 lifts and projects the operation unit 406 together with the main body unit 405. Further, when the configuration is adopted, not only the coil spring 424 that urges the operation unit 406 in the protruding direction but also the coil spring 424 that urges the operation unit 406 in the protruding direction in order to prevent the operation unit 406 from being lifted (sticking to the player's hand and being lifted together). , A coil spring (which has a weaker urging force than the coil spring 424) that urges the operation unit 406 in the immersion direction may be provided. In this case, the operation unit 406 can be projected by supplying air from the air pump 440 to the effect button 125 stronger than the urging force of the coil spring that urges the operation unit 406 in the immersion direction, and the operation unit 406 can be projected in the immersion direction. By supplying air from the air pump 440 to the effect button 125 to the extent that it does not become stronger than the urging force of the coil spring that urges the operation unit 406, it is possible to change the operated feel of the operation unit 406 without projecting the operation unit 406. can.

Further, it is possible to omit the air pump 440, the configuration in which the wind blows from the handle 18, and the exhaust passage 432. Further, an air pressure interlocking accessory as an interlocking means that can operate by air pressure may be provided, and the air pressure interlocking accessory and the exhaust passage 432 may communicate with each other. That is, instead of or in addition to the second passage 437 communicating with the handle 18, a branch (third passage) communicating with the pneumatic interlocking accessory and a third valve are provided, and the third valve and the third valve are provided. By appropriately adjusting and controlling the 1st and 2nd valves 438 and 439, the air pressure interlocking accessory may be interlocked when the operation unit 406 is pressed, or the air pressure interlocking accessory may be moved by driving the air pump 440. It may be configured. Further, the air pump 440 may be provided with soundproofing measures (for example, covered with a housing) so that the driving sound of the air pump 440 makes it difficult to recognize the driving of the air pump 440.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the momentum (air volume) of the air blown out from the ventilation hole 18b of the handle 18 is adjusted by adjusting the opening degree of the first and second valves 438 and 439. More specifically, for example, inside the handle 18, a turntable that can change the number of the ventilation holes 18b that are open to the outside among the plurality of ventilation holes 18b is provided to change the total area of the blowout holes. By changing the number of the ventilation holes 18b to be opened, the strength of the wind blown from the ventilation holes 18b may be adjustable.

The use example of the pipe provided with a branch is not particularly limited. For example, a Y-shaped pipe is installed immediately in front of a predetermined sound source, and a valve is provided at each branch of the Y-shaped pipe to provide each branch. It may be configured so that the volume output through can be adjusted. Further, for example, when a whistle member such as a whistle that makes a sound by passing air is installed in the pipe and the operation unit 406 is operated, the air pushed out from the effect button 125 passes through the whistle member and makes a sound. It may be configured. In addition, the wiring of the operation detection sensor 427 may be taken out of the main body 405 via the exhaust passage 432. In this case, it is possible to avoid forming a hole for passing the wiring separately in the main body portion 405, and it is possible to improve the sealing property.

(D) In the above embodiment, there is a possibility that the button effect is performed when the action effect is not performed, and when either the action effect or the button effect is performed at the time of a big hit or in the probability change mode, the duplication occurs. Therefore, the air effect is configured to be performed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and the setting can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the effect contents using the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1, the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10, the effect button 125, and the like are not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, in a configuration in which a predetermined logotype is displayed in black and white on the decorative symbol display device 42, and a jackpot state occurs when the logotype is repainted in a predetermined color triggered by the operation of the effect button 125, the unit side proximity The detection by the detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 may trigger an effect display (for example, suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit) around the logotype.

In the above embodiment, the effect button 125 may protrude at the start of the button effect and at the timing when the detection by the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 disappears. That is, when performing an effect of projecting the effect button 125, the player's hand trying to operate the effect button 125 at a relatively high speed and the main body 405 are displaced to the projecting position as in the above embodiment. It is desirable to set the timing so that the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 does not conflict (do not point).

Further, the pattern of mode change such as the operation of the effect button 125 is not particularly limited. For example, in the above embodiment, the effect button 125 may be projected at the start of the button effect (see step S7208 and FIG. 47 in FIG. 41), but the proximity detection sensor AE1 may be projected before the effect button 125 is projected. Then, it is determined whether or not there is detection of AE2, and if it is determined that both proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 are detected, the effect is produced until one of the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 is not detected. It may be configured to wait for the protrusion of the button 125. For example, when a dedicated flag is set in step S7208 and it is confirmed that the flag is set in the confirmation process performed at predetermined time intervals, it is determined whether or not both proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 are detected. However, when affirmative determination is made here, a command for actually projecting the effect button 125 may be output. In this case, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which the player's hand approaching the effect button 125 and the operating unit 406 of the projecting effect button 125 collide with each other at an unexpected angle. However, the player's hand is stopped for a predetermined time at a position detected by both proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 (either one is possible) above the effect button 125 to perform a predetermined effect (for example, a jackpot or a probability change). When teaching something advantageous to the player such as a mode, the operation unit 406 protrudes or emits light, while teaching something unfavorable to the player such as disengagement, or something advantageous to the player. If the operation unit 406 is hidden for the time being, the operation unit 406 may be immersed or turned off, etc.). It should be noted that the fact that the hand is stopped above the effect button 125 (operation unit 406) may or may not be in contact with the operation unit 406 and the hand. Further, for example, the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like may issue an instruction such as "hold down the effect button 125", and the effect button 125 may be brought into a protruding state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the button effect, the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 is immersed in the wake of the detection of both proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2, but the immersive operation unit 406 is returned to the original position. When returning, it is confirmed whether or not the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 are detected, and if it is determined that neither is detected, the stepping motor 407 is driven to drive the main body 405. It may be configured to be displaced to an upper reference position. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the operating unit 406, which is displaced in a protruding manner, comes into contact with the player's hand. In the above embodiment, the effect button 125 is operated, the emission color of the effect button 125 is changed, and the sensors ME1 to ME5, AE1, AE2, etc. are associated with each other. In addition to the ones exemplified in the embodiments, the effect button 125 can be changed in various modes. For example, when the operation unit 406 is projected, the protrusion speed is gradually slowed down, a small amount of blue light is projected, then the light is turned off to return to the reference position, and then the red light is emitted again to greatly project, or the effect button 125 is repeatedly pressed. At the same time, when any of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 is detected internally, the operation feel of the effect button 125 may be changed.

(E) Further, in the above embodiment, when the predetermined conditions are satisfied and the detection inputs of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are valid, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity are enabled. The combination and order of detection of the detection sensor AE2 and the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 determined on the pachinko machine 10 side (sub-control device 262, etc.) triggered by the establishment of the predetermined conditions. When the combination and the order match, the gaming state may be different from the case where the combination and the order do not match. For example, in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, a lottery is performed when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 (the detection of the through gate switch 225), and if the lottery is won, the table or the like is displayed. The combination and order of detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are determined with reference to the navigation process (motion detection sensors ME1 to indicate the order of detection). When the three-color LED 452 of the ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 is turned on and the detection input is completed, the lower winning opening 33b (opening / closing member 33c) of the starting winning unit 33 is opened for a specified time. It may be configured as. Of course, if the combination and order of detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 detected and input by the player do not match those determined on the pachinko machine 10 side, the pachinko machine is not opened. ..

In this example, the function of determining the combination and order of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 constitutes the detection information internal determination means, and the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 The function of determining whether or not the combination and order of the two are the same as the combination and order of the detections actually performed by the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 constitutes the match determination means. do.

It should be noted that not only when the combination and order of detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are completely navigated, but also a part of the navigation is performed or there is no navigation, and the game is played. It may be configured so that the combination and the order can be guessed only by the feeling of the person. Further, the privilege when the combination and order of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 match is not particularly limited, and 1) the acquisition of the game ball (the above-mentioned start winning unit). In addition to 33, an open / close type ball-entry means that can change the state between the open state and the closed state, such as the variable winning device 32, may be opened), and 2) a state advantageous for the player. The right to extend the period (time reduction mode, period such as probability variation mode that ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times) may be granted, or 3) provided in the game area. The movable accessory is interlocked, and the flow of the game ball changes (for example, it becomes easier to enter the ball entrance 151 to the through gate 34 or the warp flow path 152, and by extension, it becomes easier to obtain the corresponding lottery opportunity). 4) A special effect or the like may be derived from the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like, or 5) game data may be transmitted to and from the server via the mobile communication terminal. A predetermined point may be given in a mobile interlocking game performed by exchanging. 6) For example, there are a plurality of openable / closable ball-entry means such as a variable winning device 32 (lower winning opening 33b). At the same time, when a plurality of variable winning devices 32 are randomly opened, navigation may be performed as to which variable winning device 32 is opened, 7) for example. , The variable winning device 32 (lower winning opening 33b) and the like may be configured so that there are a plurality of opening timings of the opening / closing type ball-entry means, and the timings are navigated. 8) The game mode in which the player is staying. Or, if it is a slot machine, the setting may be suggested.

(F) In the above embodiment, after the detection input operation to the motion detection unit 451 is completed in the action effect (the number of detections of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 reaches the upper limit number of detection inputs). , The result of the action effect is displayed by operating the effect button 125, but the action effect may be activated when the detection input operation is completed without performing the button operation. Further, in the above embodiment, when the detection input operation to the motion detection unit 451 is completed by the action effect, the combination of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 that have been detected and input is displayed. You may confirm whether this is all right.

Further, in the above embodiment, the detection information by the motion detection unit 451 is mainly reflected in the display effect of the decorative symbol display device 42, but is visible to the player, for example, in the game area or the like. The movable accessory is arranged so that the movable accessory cannot be touched, and the movable accessory operates according to the combination and order of detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME10, the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, and the like. It may be configured as. In this case, it is possible to derive a novel effect such that the accessory is displaced according to the movement of the player. Further, for example, by determining the degree of displacement based on the combination of a plurality of motion detection sensors and the like, it is possible to perform more complicated motions.

(G) In the above embodiment, the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7 are configured to be able to detect the player's absence from the seat, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is the front side. A hook portion as a baggage storage portion that can lock the hand (handle portion) of the umbrella is provided on any of the front surfaces of the frame set 14, and the hand of the umbrella hung on the hook portion is provided. A lost-and-found detection sensor may be provided as a lost-and-found detecting means capable of detecting a lost item. Then, when the change from the player's gaming posture to the standing posture is detected by the motion detection sensor ME in the state where the forgotten object detection sensor is being detected, a notification by a predetermined notification means (for example, a hook) is performed. A lamp provided exclusively in the vicinity of the unit may emit light, an announcement of a forgotten item may be made by the decorative symbol display device 42, an announcement may be made by voice, etc.). In this case, it is convenient to have a place to hang an umbrella in the game hall, and it is possible to prevent the umbrella from being misplaced. Further, by using the detection information by the motion detection sensor ME, the notification by the predetermined notification means is performed only when the player leaves the seat. Therefore, by using the hook portion, it is possible to avoid an annoying situation in which the notification means is always in the notification state. In addition, instead of or in addition to the hook part on which the umbrella is hung, a shelf part is provided as a baggage storage part on which another small item carried by the player can be placed, and the forgotten item detection sensor can use the small item placed on the shelf part. It may be configured to detect.

(H) In the above embodiment, when an effect using the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME10 (a reaction effect in which a character or the like in the decorative symbol display device 42 reacts to the detection of the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME10) is performed. , An operation speed measurement timer is provided as an operation speed measuring means for measuring the time from the time when a predetermined sensor is detected among the operation detection sensors ME8 to ME10 to the time when another sensor is detected, and the operation speed is measured. It is determined whether or not the timer measurement time is longer than a predetermined specified time (the function that performs such determination constitutes the operation speed determination means), and is derived by referring to different tables according to the determination result. It may be decided to determine the production. In this case, the above-mentioned effects such as directing and diversifying the playability are more reliably achieved. In addition, an operation preference counter (operation preference counting means) that counts the determination result of the measured value by the operation speed measurement timer is provided, and an effect that reflects the operation tendency of the player can be derived according to the count value. May be good.

(I) In the above embodiment, the piezoelectric means having a piezoelectric body may be provided at a position where the operation unit 406 is pressed against the operation unit 406 by operating the operation unit 406 toward the operation position side. In this case, for example, the operation of the operation unit 406 can be detected by the voltage generated by applying pressure to the piezoelectric means. Therefore, it is possible to use it for detecting the operation of the effect button 125 without wasting the energy for operating the effect button 125. Further, for example, it is possible to generate a sound by applying a voltage that changes at a predetermined cycle to the piezoelectric means to vibrate the piezoelectric means, or to change the feeling of operating the operation unit 406. It should be noted that the piezoelectric means and an electric device such as a lamp may be electrically connected, and the electric device generated by operating the operation unit 406 many times may be used for the electric device. In addition, when it is desired to grasp that the operation unit 406 is continuously operated for a predetermined period, another detection means such as an optical sensor or an electric switch may be used or used in combination with the piezoelectric means. Is desirable.

(J) The number and arrangement of the motion detection units 451 are not particularly limited and can be appropriately installed. For example, as the number of motion detection sensor MEs is increased, the gap between the player's motion and the corresponding effect can be reduced as much as possible. That is, if there is a C point between the A point and the B point as the installation location of the motion detection sensor ME, whether the player's hand is located between the A point and the C point, or the B point and the C point. It becomes possible to grasp whether it is located between. Therefore, it becomes easier to transfer emotions to the corresponding effect (for example, by using it for a reaction effect performed by using the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME10 during the jackpot state), and as a result, the interest is improved. be able to.

Further, for example, the motion detection unit 451 may be configured to be able to recognize the motion of the player looking back and / or the motion of the player stretching. Further, for example, in a state in which the occurrence of a special gaming state has been determined (however, the player has not been notified), an action in which the player looks back or the player stretches is detected by the motion detecting means ( , And winning in a dedicated lottery), and at that time, it may be configured to teach the occurrence of a special gaming state. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances that the player can experience the fun of linking his / her own movement and the production, and he / she can engage in the game more positively.

On the other hand, for example, in order not to overlook the teaching of the special game state, which is a moment of joy for the player, or the announcement indicating the game method, etc., while the player is looking away, the special game state If the movement is detected by the motion detection means when the player looks back or the player stretches in the state where the occurrence is determined (however, the player is not notified), at that time , It may be configured not to derive the instruction or announcement of the occurrence of the special gaming state.

Further, if the motion detection unit 451 confirms that the player has left the seat during the variation display that teaches the result of the predetermined lottery, the state of the variation display is maintained as it is from the time when the confirmation is made (variation display). Changes when the player's seating is confirmed by the state in which the stop display is not displayed, or / and the effect accompanying the fluctuation display is temporarily stopped), the motion detection unit 451 is detected (the steering wheel 18 can be operated), and the like. It may be configured so that the display is resumed (in a state of progress). In this case, if you want to go to the toilet or a mobile phone call during the variable display, you can leave your seat without worrying about the variable display. Therefore, the convenience can be dramatically improved.

(K) In the above embodiment, when an action effect or a button effect is performed (for example, detection input by the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side detection sensor AE2 even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the action effect). If there is no action, or after the action effect is started, the action effect is canceled by operating the effect button 125 before the detection by the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side detection sensor AE2 reaches the upper limit of the number of detection inputs. In a possible configuration, when the cancel operation is performed), the lineup of benefits given by participating in the action effect or the button effect may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to improve the motivation to participate in the action effect and the effect using the button effect.

(L) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 of various jackpot types, and the like are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / losing lottery fluctuates between the probability variation mode and the other modes, but the winning probability does not fluctuate (is constant) and is given after the jackpot state ends. The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns of time reduction mode periods (number of fluctuations) are prepared.

Further, in the above embodiment, there are cases where the jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the upper winning opening 33a and the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the lower winning opening 33b. It may be configured so that the ratio of the jackpot type given is different. For example, the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the upper winning opening 33a and the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the lower winning opening 33b are "7RN". The ratio may be the same, but the ratio of "16RS" (in other words, the ratio of "7RS") may be different.

(M) In the above embodiment, the holding of the variable display is taught to the player by the holding lamps 46a and 46b, but the holding may be taught by other display means. For example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the image object meaning hold is displayed in a one-to-one correspondence with the held variable display so that the hold of the first variable display or the hold of the second variable display can be known. You may.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ball of the game ball is entered into the lower winning opening 33b which is reserved after the variation display (first variation display) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper winning opening 33a which has already been reserved. The second variation display is preferentially digested by moving the reserved order back and forth, such that the variation display based on (the second variation display) is digested before the first variation display. However, regardless of whether it is the first variable display or the second variable display, it may be configured to be digested in the reserved order.

(N) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to perform the normal processing (see FIG. 10) after the main processing (see FIG. 9), but is particularly limited to such a configuration. is not it. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating the counter value, which was performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal process in the above embodiment (step S210 is omitted), is performed, for example, every 2 msec. In the timer interrupt processing, the processing performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal processing in the above embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the process of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure occurs. There is a configuration in which the flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the process of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt process as in the above embodiment.

(O) In the above embodiment, the information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs is overwritten in the hit / miss random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, but such a configuration is particularly important. It is not limited to. For example, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area may be provided with a storage area for storing information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs, in addition to the winning random number storage area, or the special fluctuation holding area may be provided. In addition to the area, an execution area of the special variable hold area and a storage area corresponding to each hold area may be provided individually, and information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs may be stored in the storage area. In addition to the winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area that stores the type of jackpot may be provided, or a reach random number storage area that stores the value of the variable selection counter C3. Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided.

(P) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a movable means that can be changed into a specific area in which a game ball moving in a game area can enter, an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits the ball from entering the specific area ( Detects variable ball-entry means including a wing member), specific ball-entry means and non-specific ball-entry means that allow a game ball that has entered a specific area to enter, and a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. Specific entry detection means (condition satisfaction detection means), start entry means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and a game ball entered into the start entry means. It is equipped with a starting ball entry detecting means for detecting the above and a main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and when a game ball enters a specific area, the game ball is specified as a specific ball entry means and non-specific. A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player regardless of which of the ball entry means is used, and the main control means is the variable ball entry means based on the detection of the start ball entry detection means. A small hit state in which the ball is opened once or a plurality of times for only the first hour, or a variable winning means in which the variable ball-entry means is opened for a second time longer than the first hour, or is opened. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a big hit state in which a specified number of game balls are entered in one round, and if a small hit is won in the winning or not lottery, a small hit state is obtained. It may be applied to a gaming machine in which a jackpot state is generated when a jackpot is won in a winning / losing lottery and when a specific ball entry detection means is detected. In this case, the variable winning means corresponds to the variable winning device. In addition to pachinko machines, it is also implemented as an arrange ball machine, various similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as rotating cylinder type game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines. You may.

(Q) Further, a proximity sensor as a proximity detection means may be provided individually corresponding to each stop button of the slot machine that plays a game using a medal as a game medium. That is, in recent years, when a child actor who wins a prize is established by operating the stop buttons in a specific order, the state of navigating the operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons (so-called assist time or assist replay time). Etc.) are set. In this case, you can get a predetermined number of medals by operating the stop buttons in the navigated order, but if you operate the stop buttons in a different order from the navigated order, you will not be able to get medals. However, depending on the model, the state of navigating the push order may be interrupted or terminated. In addition, in some of these models, the order in which the stop buttons are pressed is specified even during normal times, and if the stop buttons are operated in an order contrary to this specification, bonuses, assist replay time, etc. The lottery will not be held, which is disadvantageous for the player.

In this regard, by providing a proximity sensor for each stop button individually, it is possible to derive a warning sound and warning display in advance when the stop buttons are about to be operated in the wrong order. You can avoid mistakes. Further, the proximity detection sensor may be provided directly behind the stop button. More specifically, the operation unit of the stop button that appears in the front and back and the proximity sensor are unitized, and the proximity sensor detects the finger of a player approaching to operate the stop button through the operation surface of the operation unit. It may be configured as follows. In this case, as compared with the case where the proximity sensor is installed on the peripheral portion of the stop button, it is possible to reduce the situation where an operation different from the operation of the corresponding stop button is detected.

(R) In the above embodiment, the wind may blow out from the ventilation hole 18b of the handle 18 in mechanically interlocking (chaining) with the displacement of the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125, but it is mechanically linked to the displacement of the operation unit 406. The configuration for interlocking with the above is not particularly limited, and other components may be mechanically interlocked with each other. Hereinafter, an example of the mode of the interlocking mechanism linked to the effect button 125 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory (crab) 801 and the second movable accessory (crab) 801 as interlocking means with respect to the position visible (and inaccessible) to the player on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. A movable accessory (turtle) 802 is provided. A first accessory interlocking gear 803 as a first interlocking member interlocking with the first movable accessory 801 and a second accessory interlocking gear 804 as a second interlocking member interlocking with the second movable accessory 802 are provided. ing. Further, a driven gear 805 interlocked with the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 is provided, and the power due to the displacement of the operation unit 406 transmitted via the driven gear 805 is transmitted to the first accessory interlocking gear 803 and the second accessory interlocking gear 804. A transmission member 806 capable of transmitting to is provided.

The transmission member 806 includes a main pinion 807 that is meshed with the driven gear 805, a first transmission pinion 808 that is meshed with the first accessory interlocking gear 803, and a first transmission pinion 808 that sandwiches the main pinion 807. At the center (rotation center) of the second transmission pinion 809, which is arranged on the opposite side and meshes with the second accessory interlocking gear 804, the main pinion 807, the first transmission pinion 808, and the second transmission pinion 809. It is provided with a cylindrical shaft portion 810 that connects the two.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, an arm member 821 including a pair of bearing portions 822 that rotatably supports the pair of shaft portions 810 of the transmission member 806 is provided, and the arm member 821 is transmitted. A first motor 823 that moves the arm member 821 up and down together with the member 806, and a second motor (not shown) that moves the arm member 821 left and right together with the transmission member 806 and the first motor 823 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the distance between the first accessory interlocking gear 803 and the second accessory interlocking gear 804 is the distance between the first transmission pinion 808 and the second transmission pinion 809. It is shorter and the thickness of the driven gear 805 is thicker than that of the main pinion 807. With such a configuration, in the transmission member 806, the driven gear 805 and the main pinion 807 mesh with each other, and the first accessory interlocking gear 803 and the first transmission pinion 808 mesh with each other (the second accessory interlocking gear 804 and the second accessory interlocking gear 804 and the second). The first transmission position (which does not mesh with the transmission pinion 809), the driven gear 805 and the main pinion 807 mesh with each other, and the second accessory interlocking gear 804 and the second transmission pinion 809 mesh with each other (first accessory interlocking gear 803). It is configured to be displaceable at the second transmission position (which does not mesh with the first transmission pinion 808). When the transmission member 806 is in the first transmission position, the first movable accessory (crab) 801 is interlocked when the operation unit 406 is pressed, and when the transmission member 806 is in the second transmission position, the transmission member 806 is in the second transmission position. When the operation unit 406 is pressed, the second movable accessory (turtle) 802 is interlocked.

Further, the transmission member 806 of the present embodiment is located below the first transmission position and the second transmission position, and the power due to the displacement of the operation unit 406 is applied to the first accessory interlocking gear 803 and the second accessory interlocking gear 804. It can be displaced to a retracted position that does not transmit to either. In this example, in the state where the normal button effect is not performed, the transmission member 806 is held in the retracted position, and even when the transmission member 806 moves back and forth between the first transmission position and the second transmission position, the retracted position is temporarily set. It is designed to go through. The state in which the transmission member 806 is in the first transmission position corresponds to the first interlocking state, and the state in which the transmission member 806 is in the second transmission position corresponds to the second interlocking state. However, the state in which the transmission member 806 is in the first transmission position or the second transmission position may correspond to the second interlocking state, and the state in which the transmission member 806 is in the retracted position may correspond to the first interlocking state. Further, the arm member 821, the first motor 823, and the second motor (and the sub control device 263 that controls these motors) constitute the transmission operation means, and the target switching means is composed of these and the transmission member 806.

Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined to displace the transmission member 806 to the first transmission position or the second transmission position, the transmission member 806 is set to the first transmission position or the first transmission position triggered by the detection by the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1. It is designed to be displaced to the second transmission position. In addition, the expectation of a jackpot state is higher when the first movable accessory 801 and the second movable accessory 802 are not interlocked than when they are interlocked, and the second movable accessory 801 is more movable than when the first movable accessory 801 is interlocked. It is associated so that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot state is higher when the accessory 802 is interlocked. In this example, the displacement of the transmission member 806 starts only when the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 is detected, but only when the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is detected, or when the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 are detected. The transmission member 806 may be displaced only by detecting either one, or if the meshing shift can be performed more quickly, both the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 can be detected. It may be a necessary configuration.

In addition, in this example, the first independent motor 801 and the second movable accessory 802 can be operated independently instead of being interlocked with the operation of the operation unit 402. 831 and a second independent motor 832 are provided. Then, using the first independent motor 831 and the second independent motor 832, for example, triggered by the detection of the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2, the first independent motor is performed before the player operates the operation unit 406. An effect such as driving the 831 or the second independent motor 832 to surprise the player is performed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the player simply operates the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 in the same manner, and the target (first movable accessory 801 and second movable accessory 802) linked to the operation. ) Is switched, and you can enjoy the change of mode. Therefore, it is possible to add novel fun to the operation of the effect button 125 and to diversify the effect and playability without bothering the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, when the operation timing of the first motor 823 and the second motor is too early with respect to the timing when the player operates the operation unit 406, the driving sound of the first motor 823 and the second motor is easily noticed. Or, the first motor 823 and the second motor are driven to displace the arm member 821 and the transmission member 806, but the switching operation is wasted because the player did not operate the operation unit 406. Is a concern. On the other hand, if the operation start timing of the first motor 823 and the second motor is too late, there is a concern that the timing of the operation of the operation unit 406 by the player may not be in time. On the other hand, according to this example, the detection of the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 triggers the start of driving the first motor 823 and the second motor at a timing shortly before the operation of the operation unit 406 is performed. And the above concerns can be dispelled.

Further, in this example, the first independent motor 831 and the second independent motor 832 that can operate the first movable accessory 801 and the second movable accessory 802 without interlocking with the operation of the operation unit 406 are provided. In addition, the first independent motor 831 and the second independent motor 832 are driven to start when the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 are detected. As a result, the operation of the first movable accessory 801 and the second movable accessory 802 can be started not only at the timing triggered by the operation of the operation unit 406 but also at the timing slightly before the operation of the operation unit 406. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation when the operation unit 406 is operated to break the rut, and to expect the occurrence of a jackpot state that is advantageous for the player, and the first movable accessory 801 and the second movable accessory. It is possible to improve the playability by associating it with the timing at which 802 operates.

When the player operates the operation unit 406 (detection of the operation detection sensor 427) while the transmission member 806 is displaced from the retracted position to the first transmission position, the transmission member 806 May be configured to return to the retracted position, to stand by at the first transmission position, or to be displaced to the second transmission position. In this case, when the operation unit 406 is operated again after the hand is released from the operation unit 406, the interlocking first movable accessory 801 and the second movable accessory 802 will be different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation when the operation unit 406 is operated, and it is possible to determine the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot state and whether or not the interlocking first movable accessory 801 and the second movable accessory 802 change. Corresponding, the playability can be improved.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments are described below.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching device enters the starting ball entry means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot state is generated, and a lottery is performed using a variable display device. Variable display for teaching the results is performed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

Further, in recent years, an operation means has been provided in which the content of the production or the like is changed or the option is determined by the operation by the player.

However, in these days when operating means are generally provided and every game machine maker is producing according to the operation of the same operating means, it is no longer possible to be interested in the operation of the operating means. There is a possibility that The above-mentioned problems are not limited to pachinko machines, but are also problems that apply to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of imparting novel fun to an operation on an operating means. ..

Means A-1. An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a proximity detecting means capable of detecting an operation for operating the operating means.

According to the means A-1, since it is possible to detect in advance that there is an operation on the operating means, it is possible to perform an effect using the information. For example, based on the detection by the proximity detection means, before the operation of the operation means is performed, an effect related to the effect performed when the operation means is operated is performed, or the mode of the operation means itself is changed. be able to. Further, for example, based on the detection information of the proximity detection means and the operation detection means, it is possible to grasp that the player's hand is present near the operation means although the operation means is not operated, and accordingly. It is possible to develop the production. Therefore, it is possible to add novel fun to the operation of the operating means and to diversify the production and playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, when trying to perform a pre-production that changes the mode of the operating means or suggests a result according to the operation of the operating means when operating the operating means, the start timing of the pre-production that the gaming machine applies. If is determined arbitrarily, the timing may be too early or too late for the operation timing of the operating means. That is, if the timing of the pre-production is too early, there is a concern that the player may easily notice it or that the interval between the operation of the operating means and the operation of the operating means may be too wide to be excited. On the other hand, if the timing of the pre-production is too late (for example, the pre-production is started at the timing when the operating means is touched a little), there is a concern that there will be no time grace for the pre-production. On the other hand, such a problem can be eliminated by executing the mode change shortly before the operation to the operating means triggered by the detection of the proximity detecting means. Therefore, the timing of the pre-effect and the operation effect can be perfectly matched, and the player's feelings can be more surely enhanced by such a series of flowing effects. Further, although the operation effect for operating the operation means has been derived, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the advance effect is unnecessarily performed when the player does not operate the operation means.

It should be noted that, based on the detection by the proximity detection means, as an effect related to the effect performed when the operation means is operated before the operation of the operation means, for example, a predetermined logotype is displayed on a predetermined display device. In a configuration in which a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs when the logotype is displayed in black and white and the logotype is changed to a predetermined color when the operation means is operated, the logo is triggered by the detection by the proximity detection means. The effect may be displayed around the type. Further, when a mechanical state change that takes a relatively longer time than an electrical state change (image switching, etc.) is performed according to the operation of the operating means, the mechanical state change is based on the detection of the proximity detecting means. It may be assumed that various state changes are configured to be feasible in advance. In this case, the mechanical state change can be made in time during the operation of the operating means, and the effect of the mechanical state change can be executed during the operation of the operating means. In addition, "a mode of the operation means that is not operated at the stage where the operation detection means is not detected after the proximity detection means is detected based on the detection of the proximity detection means. May be configured to be changeable. " In this case, for example, the operation unit operated by the player among the operation means is configured to be capable of appearing and disappearing in a state where the operation is not performed, and when the proximity detection means is detected, the operation unit is before the player touches the operation means. The operating means may be configured to protrude from the reference position or retract from the reference position. Further, for example, when the operating means has a built-in light emitting means and at least a part of the operating means is made of a transparent or translucent material capable of transmitting the light of the light emitting means, and the proximity detecting means is detected. The light emitting means may be configured to be capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner before the player touches the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may be provided with a plurality of light sources, or may be provided with a driving means such as a motor so as to be rotatable or displaceable.

In the case of a pachinko machine, examples of the operating means include a button, a touch sensor, a handle, and the like for directing the display content of a predetermined display device to be changed or a predetermined sound to be played according to the operation. In terms of slot machines, there are bet buttons for betting credited medals, stop buttons, production buttons, touch sensors, start levers, and the like. Further, what is detected by the proximity detecting means is generally considered to be the hand of a player who approaches (closes to) the operating means in an attempt to operate the operating means, but of course other things (for example, a game). It is also possible that it is a person's elbow, a PET bottle held by a player, etc.).

Means A-2. The proximity detection means is composed of at least two sensors mounted in different directions from each other, and when a plurality of sensors constituting the proximity detection means are detected, the proximity detection means detects the proximity detection means. The gaming machine according to means A-1, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the means A-2, it is possible to three-dimensionally detect a player's hand or the like approaching the operating means in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the movement of the player unrelated to the operation of the operating means is detected.

Means A-3. An operation speed measuring means that measures the time from the time when the proximity detecting means detects the operation to the time when the operation to the operating means is detected.
The gaming machine according to means A-1 or A-2, which comprises an operation speed determining means for determining whether or not the measurement time by the operating speed measuring means is the first hour or more.

According to the means A-3, different effects are derived depending on whether the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means is 1 hour or more and less than the 1st time (refer to different tables when determining the type of effect). It can be configured as follows. Therefore, the above-mentioned effects such as directing and diversifying the playability are more reliably achieved.

An operation time measuring means for measuring the time during which the operation detecting means is continuously detected is provided, and the measurement time by the operation time measuring means is predetermined when determining the effect to be performed based on the operation of the operating means. It may be determined whether or not the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, and the effect is determined according to the determination result.

Means A-4. Operation preference for counting the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means is equal to or longer than the first hour, and / and the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means is less than the first hour. The gaming machine according to means A-3, which comprises a counting means.

According to the means A-4, by confirming the count value of the operation taste counting means, it is possible to grasp the tendency of the operation method of the player to the operation means, that is, the hobby preference of the player regarding the operation of the operation means. It is possible to reflect such hobbies and tastes in the production related to the operation of the operating means. For example, when the operation preference counting means is the first time or more, that is, for a player who operates the operation means after waiting for a predetermined time in the vicinity of the operation means before operating the operation means. A state in which the occurrence of a special game state (for example, jackpot state, probability variation mode, time reduction mode, bonus, assist replay time) that is advantageous to the player has been determined (however, the special game state has not yet started, and the teaching is also provided. By operating the operating means after having the hand wait for a predetermined time in the vicinity of the operating means before operating the operating means, as described above, the occurrence of the special gaming state is quickly taught. It can also be configured as follows. As a result, the player can realize that such a notification effect is derived (reflected) because of his / her own operation, and can obtain a further sense of fulfillment and accomplishment. ..

Means A-5. Multiple motion detection means that can detect the player's motion,
A motion storage area capable of storing a combination (and order) of detections of the motion detection means is provided.
(The motion detecting means also includes the proximity detecting means.)
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect is determined according to the storage information of the operation storage area by taking into consideration the storage information of the operation storage area when determining the effect to be performed based on the detection of the operation detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-4.

According to the means A-5, causing the motion detecting means to detect the player's motion is an input operation for determining the pattern of the effect to be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the player's motion. The effect is executed according to the combination (and order) of detection of the motion detecting means that has detected the above. For this reason, the input operation itself by the player can be made various rather than one-sided, and the production performed in response to the operation input by the player can be made more diverse, and by extension, the movement of the player. Since the effect can be derived, it is possible to derive the effect that the player can more easily embrace. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel fun to the input operation by the player, and to make the player more familiar and more versatile. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest. Examples of the "effect corresponding to the player's movement" include, for example, the character performing the same action as the player or reacting to the player's action on the display device.

In addition, the arrangement of the motion detecting means is relatively free, and by interspersing the motion detecting means on the front surface of the gaming machine as a whole, an area that was conventionally only used for decoration or the like is also used. It is possible to perform a dynamic production that fully uses the front surface of the gaming machine, and it is possible to provide a novel playability.

Means A-6. The gaming machine according to means A-5, wherein light emitting means is provided corresponding to each of the motion detecting means.

According to the means A-6, the position of the motion detecting means is suggested, a predetermined action is performed (the order of detection is suggested), and it is taught whether the detection is surely performed by the target motion detecting means. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to greatly assist the player's understanding of the effect of using the motion detecting means.

Means A-7. When the condition for storing the detection information by the motion detection means in the motion storage area is satisfied, the detection information internal determination means for determining the combination (and order) of the detections of the motion detection means, and the detection information internal determination means.
The combination (and order) of detection of the motion detecting means stored in the motion storage area and the combination (and order) of detection of the motion detecting means determined by the detection information internal determination means match. Equipped with a match determination means for determining whether or not
The gaming machine according to means A-5 or A-6, wherein when a positive determination is made by the match determination means, a process different from that when a negative determination is made is executed.

According to the means A-7, the playability using the motion detecting means can be further improved.

Means A-8. The motion detecting means is arranged so as to be able to identify the leaving of the player who is seated in front of the gaming machine and plays the game.
If the player's departure is confirmed by the motion detecting means during the teaching effect (variable display) that teaches the result of a predetermined lottery, the state of the teaching effect is maintained as it is from the time when it is confirmed. Stop the variable display and / or suspend the effect associated with the variable display),
When the player's seating is confirmed (by the detection of the motion detecting means, the operation of the operating means that can be operated by the player, etc.), the teaching effect is restarted (in a state of progress). The gaming machine according to any one of means A-5 to A-7.

According to the means A-8, when the person wants to go to the toilet or a mobile phone call during the teaching effect (variable display), he / she can leave the seat without worrying about the teaching effect. Therefore, the convenience can be dramatically improved.

In addition, "the motion detecting means is arranged so as to be able to identify the motion of the player looking back and / or the motion of the player stretching, and during the teaching effect (variable display) for teaching the result of a predetermined lottery. When the motion of the player looking back or the motion of the player stretching is confirmed by the motion detecting means, the state of the teaching effect is maintained from the time when the motion is confirmed, and the posture of the player returns. It may be configured so that the teaching effect is restarted when it is confirmed. " In this case, while the player is looking away, he misses the instruction of the special game state, which is a moment of joy for the player, and the announcement indicating the game method, etc. (which is disadvantageous to the player if missed). The situation can be avoided.

Means A-9. The motion detecting means is arranged so that the motion of the player looking back and / or the motion of the player stretching can be identified, and the motion detection is performed during a teaching effect (variation display) for teaching the result of a predetermined lottery. When it is confirmed that the player looks back or the player stretches by means, a definite suggestion effect indicating the result of the teaching effect may be performed even during the teaching effect. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-5 to A-8.

According to the means A-9, it is possible to increase the chances that the player can experience the fun in which his / her movement and the production are linked, and he / she can engage in the game more positively.

Means A-10. An operation speed measuring means that measures the time from the time when the predetermined motion detecting means is detected to the time when another motion detecting means is detected.
The game according to any one of means A-5 to A-9, which comprises an operation speed determination means for determining whether or not the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means is the second time or more. Machine.

According to the means A-10, different effects are derived depending on whether the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means is 2 hours or more and less than the 2nd time (refer to different tables when determining the type of effect). It can be configured as follows. Therefore, the above-mentioned effects such as directing and diversifying the playability are more reliably achieved.

In addition, "the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means was the second time or more, and / and the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means was less than the second time is counted. It may be said that it is provided with a means for counting movements and tastes. In this case, by confirming the count value of the motion preference counting means, the motion tendency of the player can be grasped, and such a tendency can be reflected in the production or the like.

Means A-11. The baggage of the player is left in the baggage storage section where the baggage carried by the player can be placed or locked, and / and the game machine and the game assist device (card) adjacent to the game machine. The unit, etc.) is equipped with a forgotten item detection means that stores the number of game values owned by the player and detects that a storage medium that the player can carry is left.
While the forgotten object detecting means is being detected, the motion detecting means detects the player's leaving seat motion (for example, a change from the gaming posture to a standing posture or disappearance from the front of the gaming machine). In that case, the gaming machine according to any one of means A-5 to A-10, wherein the notification is performed by a predetermined notification means.

According to the means A-11, it is possible to prevent the player from misplaced the baggage. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the storage medium is taken away when the player leaves the seat in the toilet or the like. Further, in this means, by using the detection information by the motion detecting means, the notification by the predetermined notification means is performed only when the player leaves the seat. Therefore, if the baggage storage unit is used or the storage medium is left inserted in the game assisting device, it is possible to avoid an annoying situation in which the notification means is always in the notification state. If there is a baggage storage section, it is convenient to have a place to hang an umbrella, put a cigarette, etc. in the gaming machine.

Means A-12. When a predetermined condition is satisfied and it is determined that a predetermined process is executed, when the player participates in the production performed based on the detection of the motion detecting means, or when the player does not participate. By comparison, the gaming machine according to any one of means A-5 to A-11, wherein the player may be instructed that the predetermined processing is executed at an earlier timing.

According to the means A-12, participation in the effect performed based on the detection of the motion detecting means can be promoted. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a reason for participation in the production performed based on the detection of the motion detection means, it becomes easier for the player to participate in the production both externally and internally. You can get to know the fun of the production performed based on the detection of the motion detection means.

It should be noted that "a predetermined privilege or a configuration is given by participating in an effect using the motion detection means, and is given when the effect is performed using the motion detection means. It may be "to display the lineup of benefits to be given". Even in this case, it is possible to improve the motivation to participate in the production using the motion detecting means.

Means A-13. In a configuration in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the payout means when the game balls are awarded to the winning means provided in the game area where the game balls launched by the launching means are guided.
It is provided with a storage supply unit in which a storage recess is formed to store the game balls to be paid out from the payout means and to guide the stored game balls to the launching means side.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-12, wherein the operating means and the proximity detecting means are arranged behind the storage recess.

According to the means A-13, the player manually supplies the game ball to the storage supply unit (transfers the game ball from the so-called dollar box or the lower plate to the upper plate as the storage supply unit), or the game is played from the storage supply unit. When the ball is taken out (when the game ball is taken out from the upper plate as a storage supply unit when using a coffee service etc.), the hand of the player who performs such an operation is detected by the proximity detection means. Such a situation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the proximity detecting means detects an operation unrelated to the operating means and the control related to the operation of the operating means is executed.

Means A-14. The operating means
An operation unit that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front surface of the gaming machine and is displaced between an operating position when operated and a non-operating position when not being operated.
It is provided with an urging means for urging the operating portion to the non-operating position side.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-13, wherein the operation detecting means detects that the operating portion is displaced to the operating position.

The operating means has a built-in light emitting means, and at least a part of the operating unit has a translucent property so that the light of the light emitting means can be transmitted to the outside of the operating means. May be.

Means A-15. The operating means changes the magnitude of stress acting on the operating unit when the operating unit in the non-operating position is operated to displace the operating unit toward the operating position (to the non-operating position). Means A-14 comprising an operating force adjusting means capable of operating a certain operating portion to change the magnitude of the force required to displace the operating portion toward the operating position side). The gaming machine described in.

According to the means A-15, the operating force adjusting means can change the stress acting on the operating portion when the operating portion is displaced to the operating position side. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a novel operation means such that the feeling when the player operates the operation unit changes. Therefore, by mounting the operating means on the gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect and further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, since the above-mentioned novel phenomenon (change in feel when operating the operation unit) can occur in the operation means that the player has not been interested in in the past, the player is surprised and feels fresh. You can be interested in the operation means itself. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest. Further, it is possible to perform an effect (suggestion or teaching of various gaming states, etc.) using the change in the feel when the operation unit is operated, and it is possible to expand the possibility of the effect that can be performed by the gaming machine.

Means A-16. A first passage that discharges the air pushed out by the operating unit to the back side of the gaming machine when the operating unit is operated and displaced to the operating position.
A second passage for discharging the air pushed out by the operation unit to the front side of the gaming machine, and
It is provided with a flow rate changing means capable of changing the ratio of the amount of air guided to the first passage and the amount of air guided to the second passage among the air extruded by the operation unit. The gaming machine according to the featured means A-14 or A-15.

According to the means A-16, when the player operates the operation unit, it is possible to perform an effect such that air is blown out to the front side of the gaming machine in which the player is located. In addition, the amount of blowout can be adjusted, and the effectability can be improved. In addition, in order to allow the player to more surely experience the air blown out, "the second guide passage is configured so that the discharged air can be blown to the player. It may be "to be". For example, the operating means or the peripheral portion thereof may communicate with the second guide passage so that the hand operating the operating means is blown with air by the operation of the operating means.

Regarding the means A-15, it may be said that "an air pump for sending air to the operating means side through the first passage is provided". By adopting this configuration, it is possible to change the force required for operating the operation unit and vibrate the operation unit (air is intermittently sent at a rapid pitch). Further, "the air pump may be operated at a timing triggered by the detection of the proximity detection means". That is, if the operation timing of the air pump is too early, there is a concern that the player will notice the change in the operating means, and if the operation timing of the air pump is too late, the air supply will be supplied to the player's operation unit. There is concern that it will not be in time for the operation. On the other hand, by operating the air pump shortly before the operation to the operation unit triggered by the detection of the proximity detection means, such a problem can be eliminated.

Means A-17. The operating means
A main body that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front surface of the gaming machine and that supports the operation unit so that it can be relatively displaced.
The main body portion is provided with a driving means capable of driving the main body portion in both directions of the operating position side and the non-operating position side along the displacement direction of the operating portion.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, any of the means A-14 to A-16 characterized in that the driving means drives the main body portion based on the detection information of the proximity detecting means and the operation detecting means. Described gaming machine.

According to the means A-17, it is possible to obtain an operation means from which a novel mode such as displacement of the operation unit is derived based on the detection information of the proximity detection means and the operation detection means. For example, when the proximity detection means is detected, the drive means drives the main body to the non-operation position side, and even if the player tries to operate the operation unit, the operation unit escapes. Can be done. Further, for example, when the state changes from the state in which the proximity detection means and the operation detection means are detected to the state in which the operation detection means is detected, the drive means moves the main body to the operation position side. It can be driven and produced by an operating means such that the player should have released his hand from the operation unit but was not separated.

Means A-18. When the main body is driven by the driving means, the operating surface of the operating unit in the non-operating position protrudes outward from the front surface of the gaming machine, and the operating surface of the operating unit is in a protruding state. The gaming machine according to means A-17, wherein the state can be changed to a housed state housed inside a front surface portion of the gaming machine.

According to the means A-18, it is possible to more dynamically produce the operation means by utilizing the displacement of the main body portion. Further, by setting the operation unit in the accommodated state, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the operation unit, and for example, it becomes difficult to perform an act such as banging the operation unit with a palm or a grasped hand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessive operations on the operation unit by the player (to refrain from the act of banging the operation unit), and the operation means is deteriorated or damaged at an early stage. Can be suppressed.

On the other hand, by setting the operating unit in a protruding state, the operating surface of the operating unit projects outward from the front surface of the gaming machine, so that the operating unit can be easily operated. Further, by changing the state of the operating means from the housed state to the protruding state, it is possible to make the player feel superiority complex and satisfaction by being able to operate the operating means.

Means A-19. An opening / closing means that can change the state between a closed state that covers at least a part of the operation surface of the operation unit and an open state that does not cover the operation surface is provided.
When the opening / closing means in the open state is changed to the closed state, the closed state is obtained after it is confirmed that the operation detecting means is not detected and the proximity detecting means is not detected. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-14 to A-18, wherein the state change of the above means is started.

According to the means A-19, the opening / closing means is closed after it is confirmed that the player's hand or the like is not close to the operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which the opening / closing member whose state changes to the closed state comes into contact with the player's hand. Further, by covering the operation unit with the opening / closing means, it is possible to refrain from operating the operation unit itself, and it is possible to reduce the operation frequency of the operation means (the number of operations of the operation unit). As a result, the durability of the operating means can be improved (deterioration of the operating means can be delayed), and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is hindered due to the deterioration or damage of the operating means. Can be done.

Means A-20. The operation detecting means includes a piezoelectric means having a piezoelectric body, and the operation detecting means includes a piezoelectric means.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-19, which is configured so that pressure can be applied to the piezoelectric means by operating the operation unit toward the operation position side. ..

According to the means A-20, for example, the operation of the operation unit can be detected by the voltage generated by applying pressure to the piezoelectric means. Therefore, it is possible to use it for detecting the operation of the operating means without wasting the energy for operating the operating means. Further, for example, by applying a voltage that changes at a predetermined cycle to the piezoelectric means to vibrate the piezoelectric means, it is possible to generate a sound or change the feeling of operating the operation unit.

It should be noted that the piezoelectric means may be electrically connected to an electric device such as a lamp, and the electric device generated by operating the operation unit many times may be used for the electric device. In addition, when it is desired to grasp that the operation unit is continuously operated for a predetermined period, another detection means such as an optical sensor or an electric switch may be used or used in combination instead of the piezoelectric means. desirable.

Means A-21. Multiple reels that rotate based on the operation of the start lever,
It is equipped with a stop button provided individually for each reel.
When the stop button is operated while the reel is rotating, the reel is stopped in a manner corresponding to the result of a lottery performed triggered by the operation of the start lever.
A configuration in which different controls can be executed depending on the order in which the stop buttons are operated (while the reels are rotating).
Any of the means A-1 to A-20, characterized in that a proximity detecting means capable of detecting an operation to operate the stop button in advance corresponding to each of the stop buttons is provided. The gaming machine described in.

Conventionally, slot machines that play games using medals as a game medium are supported by rotating a plurality of reels based on an operation on a start lever and operating a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each reel. The reel to do is stopped. By the way, in recent years, a child actor who does not win a prize unless he / she operates a plurality of stop buttons in a predetermined order is set, and as a kind of advantageous state for the player, when such a child actor is established, the order in which the stop button is operated ( Some have a playability called assist time (AT), such as navigating the push order). Due to the introduction of such playability, if the operations are not performed in the order navigated by an operation error or the like, the number of medals that the player can obtain may be reduced, or the player may be in an advantageous state (for example,). , The push order is navigated, and the assist replay time (ART), which increases the probability of establishment of the replay, may be interrupted or terminated, which is not preferable for the player.

In addition, in order to increase the number of medals acquired in AT and ART without increasing the number of medals acquired in normal times, the order in which the stop button is pressed is specified even in normal times (for example, the stop button to be operated first). If an operation contrary to the regulations is performed, the player will be in a disadvantageous state (for example, a non-lottery state in which a lottery such as a medal called a penalty is not performed). There are also things that end up.

Of course, if you play the game carefully, you can proceed with the game without any problems, but if you become distracted, you may make a mistake. Further, although a warning sound may be generated when the stop button is operated by mistake, there is a possibility that the player may already be in an unfavorable state when the stop button is pressed by mistake.

In this regard, according to the present means A-21, the proximity detecting means is provided corresponding to each stop button, and the navigation is performed in the situation where the operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons is navigated. It is also possible to generate a warning sound when a player's finger or the like approaching a stop button that is out of order is detected. As a result, it is possible to avoid operating the wrong stop button, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to operating the wrong button.

Means A-22. The order in which the stop buttons are operated includes a first operation order and a second operation order that is less preferable to the player than the first operation order, and the stop button is the second operation order. The gaming machine according to means A-21, wherein a warning announcement is derived when the operation to operate is detected by the proximity detection means corresponding to the stop button.

According to the means A-22, it is possible to more reliably prevent a situation in which the stop buttons are operated in the wrong order.

Means A-23. The gaming machine according to means A-21 or A-22, wherein the proximity detecting means is installed directly behind the stop button.

According to the means A-23, it is possible to reduce a situation in which an operation different from the operation of the corresponding stop button is detected. The proximity detection means may be unitized (built-in) with the stop button. In this case, it is possible to improve the mounting workability at the time of manufacturing.

Means B-1. Multiple motion detection means that can detect the player's motion,
A motion storage area capable of storing a combination (and order) of detections of the motion detection means is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when determining an effect to be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect is determined according to the stored information of the operation storage area by taking into consideration the stored information of the operation storage area.

According to the means B-1, causing the motion detecting means to detect the player's motion is an input operation for determining the pattern of the effect to be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the player's motion. The effect is executed according to the combination (and order) of detection of the motion detecting means that has detected the above. For this reason, the input operation itself by the player can be made various rather than one-sided, and the production performed in response to the operation input by the player can be made more diverse, and by extension, the movement of the player. Since the effect can be derived, it is possible to derive the effect that the player can more easily embrace. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel fun to the input operation by the player, and to make the player more familiar and more versatile. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest. Examples of the "effect corresponding to the player's movement" include, for example, the character performing the same action as the player or reacting to the player's action on the display device.

In addition, the arrangement of the motion detecting means is relatively free, and by interspersing the motion detecting means on the front surface of the gaming machine as a whole, an area that was conventionally only used for decoration or the like is also used. It is possible to perform a dynamic production that fully uses the front surface of the gaming machine, and it is possible to provide a novel playability.

Means B-2. The gaming machine according to means B-1, wherein a light emitting means is provided corresponding to each of the motion detecting means.

According to the means B-2, the position of the motion detecting means is suggested, a predetermined action is performed (the order of detection is suggested), and it is taught whether the detection is surely performed by the target motion detecting means. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to greatly assist the player's understanding of the effect of using the motion detecting means.

Means B-3. When the condition for storing the detection information by the motion detection means in the motion storage area is satisfied, the detection information internal determination means for determining the combination (and order) of the detections of the motion detection means, and the detection information internal determination means.
The combination (and order) of detection of the motion detecting means stored in the motion storage area and the combination (and order) of detection of the motion detecting means determined by the detection information internal determination means match. Equipped with a match determination means for determining whether or not
The gaming machine according to means B-1 or B-2, wherein when a positive determination is made by the match determination means, a process different from that when a negative determination is made is executed.

According to the means B-3, the playability using the motion detecting means can be further improved.

Means B-4. The motion detecting means is arranged so as to be able to identify the leaving of the player who is seated in front of the gaming machine and plays the game.
If the player's departure is confirmed by the motion detecting means during the teaching effect (variable display) that teaches the result of a predetermined lottery, the state of the teaching effect is maintained as it is from the time when it is confirmed. Stop the variable display and / or suspend the effect associated with the variable display),
When the player's seating is confirmed (by the detection of the motion detecting means, the operation of the operating means that can be operated by the player, etc.), the teaching effect is restarted (in a state of progress). The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3.

According to the means B-4, when the person wants to go to the toilet or a mobile phone call during the teaching effect (variable display), he / she can leave the seat without worrying about the teaching effect. Therefore, the convenience can be dramatically improved.

It should be noted that "the motion detecting means is arranged so as to be able to identify the motion of the player looking back and / or the motion of the player stretching, and during the teaching effect (variable display) for teaching the result of a predetermined lottery. When the motion of the player looking back or the motion of the player stretching is confirmed by the motion detecting means, the state of the teaching effect is maintained from the time of confirmation, and the player's seating is confirmed. In that case, it is configured so that the teaching effect is restarted. " In this case, while the player is looking away, he misses the instruction of the special game state, which is a moment of joy for the player, and the announcement indicating the game method, etc. (which is disadvantageous to the player if missed). The situation can be avoided.

Means B-5. The motion detecting means is arranged so that the motion of the player looking back and / or the motion of the player stretching can be identified, and the motion detection is performed during a teaching effect (variation display) for teaching the result of a predetermined lottery. When it is confirmed that the player looks back or the player stretches by means, a definite suggestion effect indicating the result of the teaching effect may be performed even during the teaching effect. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-4.

According to the means B-5, it is possible to increase the chances that the player can experience the fun in which his / her movement and the production are linked, and he / she can engage in the game more positively.

Means B-6. An operation speed measuring means that measures the time from the time when the predetermined motion detecting means is detected to the time when another motion detecting means is detected.
Any of the means B-1 to B-5 characterized in that the operation speed determination means for determining whether or not the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means is equal to or longer than a predetermined first predetermined time is provided. The game machine described in Crab.

According to the means B-6, different effects are derived depending on whether the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means is longer than or equal to the first specified time and less than the first specified time (refer to different tables when determining the type of effect). Can be configured as follows. Therefore, the above-mentioned effects such as directing and diversifying the playability are more reliably achieved.

In addition, "the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means was equal to or longer than the first specified time, and / and the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means was less than the first specified time. It may be said that it is provided with an operation taste counting means for counting. In this case, by confirming the count value of the motion preference counting means, the motion tendency of the player can be grasped, and such a tendency can be reflected in the production or the like.

Means B-7. The baggage of the player is left in the baggage storage section where the baggage carried by the player can be placed or locked, and / and the game machine and the game assist device (card) adjacent to the game machine. The unit, etc.) is equipped with a forgotten item detection means that stores the number of game values owned by the player and detects that a storage medium that the player can carry is left.
While the forgotten object detecting means is being detected, the motion detecting means detects the player's leaving seat motion (for example, a change from the gaming posture to a standing posture or a disappearance from the front of the gaming machine). In this case, the gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-6, wherein the notification is performed by a predetermined notification means.

According to the means B-7, it is possible to prevent the player from misplaced the baggage. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the storage medium is taken away when the player leaves the seat in the toilet or the like. Further, in this means, by using the detection information by the motion detecting means, the notification by the predetermined notification means is performed only when the player leaves the seat. Therefore, if the baggage storage unit is used or the storage medium is left inserted in the game assisting device, it is possible to avoid an annoying situation in which the notification means is always in the notification state. If there is a baggage storage section, it is convenient to have a place to hang an umbrella, put a cigarette, etc. in the gaming machine.

Means B-8. When a predetermined condition is satisfied and it is determined that a predetermined process is executed, when the player participates in the production performed based on the detection of the motion detecting means, or when the player does not participate. By comparison, the gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7, wherein the player may be instructed that the predetermined processing is executed at an earlier timing.

According to the means B-8, it is possible to promote participation in the effect performed based on the detection of the motion detecting means. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a reason for participation in the production performed based on the detection of the motion detection means, it becomes easier for the player to participate in the production both externally and internally. You can get to know the fun of the production performed based on the detection of the motion detection means.

It should be noted that "a predetermined privilege or a configuration is given by participating in an effect using the motion detection means, and is given when the effect is performed using the motion detection means. It may be "to display the lineup of benefits to be given". Even in this case, it is possible to improve the motivation to participate in the production using the motion detecting means.

Means B-9. An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
In addition to being provided with an operation detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-8, wherein the motion detecting means includes a proximity detecting means capable of detecting an motion for operating the operating means.

According to the means B-9, since it is possible to detect in advance that there is an operation on the operating means, it is possible to perform an effect using the information. For example, based on the detection by the proximity detection means, before the operation of the operation means is performed, an effect related to the effect performed when the operation means is operated is performed, or the mode of the operation means itself is changed. be able to. Further, for example, based on the detection information of the proximity detection means and the operation detection means, it is possible to grasp that the player's hand is present near the operation means although the operation means is not operated, and accordingly. It is possible to develop the production. Therefore, it is possible to add novel fun to the operation of the operating means and to diversify the production and playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, when trying to perform a pre-production that changes the mode of the operating means or suggests a result according to the operation of the operating means when operating the operating means, the start timing of the pre-production that the gaming machine applies. If is determined arbitrarily, the timing may be too early or too late for the operation timing of the operating means. That is, if the timing of the pre-production is too early, there is a concern that the player may easily notice it or that the interval between the operation of the operating means and the operation of the operating means may be too wide to be excited. On the other hand, if the timing of the pre-production is too late (for example, the pre-production is started at the timing when the operating means is touched a little), there is a concern that there will be no time grace for the pre-production. On the other hand, such a problem can be eliminated by executing the mode change shortly before the operation to the operating means triggered by the detection of the proximity detecting means. Therefore, the timing of the pre-effect and the operation effect can be perfectly matched, and the player's feelings can be more surely enhanced by such a series of flowing effects. Further, although the operation effect for operating the operation means has been derived, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the advance effect is unnecessarily performed when the player does not operate the operation means.

It should be noted that, based on the detection by the proximity detection means, as an effect related to the effect performed when the operation means is operated before the operation of the operation means, for example, a predetermined logotype is displayed on a predetermined display device. In a configuration in which a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs when the logotype is displayed in black and white and the logotype is changed to a predetermined color when the operation means is operated, the logo is triggered by the detection by the proximity detection means. The effect may be displayed around the type. In addition, "the mode of the operation means that is not operated at the stage where the operation detection means is not detected after the detection of the proximity detection means is performed based on the detection of the proximity detection means. It may be "configurable so that it can be changed". In this case, for example, the operation unit operated by the player among the operation means is configured to be capable of appearing and disappearing in a state where the operation is not performed, and when the proximity detection means is detected, the operation unit is before the player touches the operation means. The operating means may be configured to protrude from the reference position or retract from the reference position. Further, for example, when the operating means has a built-in light emitting means and at least a part of the operating means is made of a transparent or translucent material capable of transmitting the light of the light emitting means, and the proximity detecting means is detected. The light emitting means may be configured to be capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner before the player touches the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may be provided with a plurality of light sources, or may be provided with a driving means such as a motor so as to be rotatable or displaceable.

In the case of a pachinko machine, examples of the operating means include a button and a handle for producing a predetermined display device in which the display content of the predetermined display device is changed or a predetermined sound is played according to the operation. Speaking of machines, there are bet buttons, stop buttons, start levers, etc. for betting credited medals. Further, what is detected by the proximity detecting means is generally considered to be the hand of a player who approaches (closes to) the operating means in an attempt to operate the operating means, but of course other things (for example, a game). It is also possible that it is a person's elbow, a PET bottle held by a player, etc.).

Means B-10. An operation speed measuring means that measures the time from the time when the proximity detecting means detects the operation to the time when the operation to the operating means is detected.
The gaming machine according to means B-9, which comprises an operation speed determining means for determining whether or not the measurement time by the operating speed measuring means is equal to or longer than a predetermined second predetermined time.

According to the means B-10, different effects are derived depending on whether the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means is longer than or equal to the second specified time and less than the second specified time (refer to different tables when determining the type of effect). Can be configured as follows. Therefore, the above-mentioned effects such as directing and diversifying the playability are more reliably achieved.

An operation time measuring means for measuring the time during which the operation detecting means is continuously detected is provided, and the measurement time by the operation time measuring means is predetermined when determining the effect to be performed based on the operation of the operating means. It may be determined whether or not the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, and the effect is determined according to the determination result.

Means B-11. The number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means is equal to or longer than the second specified time and / and the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measuring means is less than the second specified time are counted. The gaming machine according to means B-10, which comprises means for counting operation tastes.

According to the means B-11, by confirming the count value of the operation taste counting means, it is possible to grasp the tendency of the operation method of the player to the operation means, that is, the hobby preference of the player regarding the operation of the operation means. It is possible to reflect such hobbies and tastes in the production related to the operation of the operating means. For example, when the operation preference counting means is the first time or more, that is, for a player who operates the operation means after waiting for a predetermined time in the vicinity of the operation means before operating the operation means. A state in which the occurrence of a special game state (for example, jackpot state, probability variation mode, time reduction mode, bonus, assist replay time) that is advantageous to the player has been determined (however, the special game state has not yet started, and the teaching is also provided. By operating the operating means after having the hand wait for a predetermined time in the vicinity of the operating means before operating the operating means, as described above, the occurrence of the special gaming state is quickly taught. It can also be configured as follows. As a result, the player can realize that such a notification effect is derived (reflected) because of his / her own operation, and can obtain a further sense of fulfillment and accomplishment. ..

Means B-12. The proximity detection means is composed of at least two sensors mounted in different directions from each other, and when a plurality of sensors constituting the proximity detection means are detected, the proximity detection means detects the proximity detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-9 to B-11.

According to the means B-12, it is possible to three-dimensionally detect a player's hand or the like approaching the operating means in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the movement of the player unrelated to the operation of the operating means is detected.

Means B-13. In a configuration in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the payout means when the game balls are awarded to the winning means provided in the game area where the game balls launched by the launching means are guided.
It is provided with a storage supply unit in which a storage recess is formed to store the game balls to be paid out from the payout means and to guide the stored game balls to the launching means side.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-9 to B-12, wherein the operating means and the proximity detecting means are arranged behind the storage recess.

According to the means B-13, the player manually supplies the game ball to the storage supply unit (transfers the game ball from the so-called dollar box or the lower plate to the upper plate as the storage supply unit), or the game is played from the storage supply unit. When the ball is taken out (when the game ball is taken out from the upper plate as a storage supply unit when using a coffee service etc.), the hand of the player who performs such an operation is detected by the proximity detection means. Such a situation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the proximity detecting means detects an operation unrelated to the operating means and the control related to the operation of the operating means is executed.

Means B-14. The operating means
An operation unit that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front surface of the gaming machine and is displaced between an operating position when operated and a non-operating position when not being operated.
It is provided with an urging means for urging the operating portion to the non-operating position side.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-9 to B-13, wherein the operation detecting means detects that the operating portion is displaced to the operating position.

The operating means has a built-in light emitting means, and at least a part of the operating unit has a translucent property so that the light of the light emitting means can be transmitted to the outside of the operating means. May be.

Means B-15. The operating means changes the magnitude of stress acting on the operating unit when the operating unit in the non-operating position is operated to displace the operating unit toward the operating position (to the non-operating position). Means B-14 provided with an operating force adjusting means capable of operating a certain operating unit to change the magnitude of the force required to displace the operating unit toward the operating position side). The gaming machine described in.

According to the means B-15, the operating force adjusting means can change the stress acting on the operating portion when the operating portion is displaced to the operating position side. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a novel operation means such that the feeling when the player operates the operation unit changes. Therefore, by mounting the operating means on the gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect and further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, since the above-mentioned novel phenomenon (change in feel when operating the operation unit) can occur in the operation means that the player has not been interested in in the past, the player is surprised and feels fresh. You can be interested in the operation means itself. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest. Further, it is possible to perform an effect (suggestion or teaching of various gaming states, etc.) using the change in the feel when the operation unit is operated, and it is possible to expand the possibility of the effect that can be performed by the gaming machine.

Means B-16. A first passage that discharges the air pushed out by the operating unit to the back side of the gaming machine when the operating unit is operated and displaced to the operating position.
A second passage for discharging the air pushed out by the operation unit to the front side of the gaming machine, and
It is provided with a flow rate changing means capable of changing the ratio of the amount of air guided to the first passage and the amount of air guided to the second passage among the air extruded by the operation unit. The gaming machine according to the featured means A-14 or A-15.

According to the means B-16, when the player operates the operation unit, it is possible to perform an effect such that air is blown out to the front side of the gaming machine in which the player is located. In addition, the amount of blowout can be adjusted, and the effectability can be improved. In addition, in order to allow the player to more surely experience the air blown out, "the second guide passage is configured so that the discharged air can be blown to the player. It may be "to be". For example, the operating means or the peripheral portion thereof may communicate with the second guide passage so that the hand operating the operating means is blown with air by the operation of the operating means.

Regarding the means B-15, it may be said that "an air pump for sending air to the operating means side through the first passage is provided". By adopting this configuration, it is possible to change the force required for operating the operation unit and vibrate the operation unit (air is intermittently sent at a rapid pitch). Further, "the air pump may be operated at a timing triggered by the detection of the proximity detection means". That is, if the operation timing of the air pump is too early, there is a concern that the player will notice the change in the operating means, and if the operation timing of the air pump is too late, the air supply will be supplied to the player's operation unit. There is concern that it will not be in time for the operation. On the other hand, by operating the air pump shortly before the operation to the operation unit triggered by the detection of the proximity detection means, such a problem can be eliminated.

Means B-17. The operating means
A main body that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front surface of the gaming machine and that supports the operation unit so that it can be relatively displaced.
The main body portion is provided with a driving means capable of driving the main body portion in both directions of the operating position side and the non-operating position side along the displacement direction of the operating portion.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, any of means B-14 to B-16 characterized in that the driving means drives the main body portion based on the detection information of the proximity detecting means and the operation detecting means. Described gaming machine.

According to the means B-17, it is possible to obtain an operation means from which a novel mode such as displacement of the operation unit is derived based on the detection information of the proximity detection means and the operation detection means. For example, when the proximity detection means is detected, the drive means drives the main body to the non-operation position side, and even if the player tries to operate the operation unit, the operation unit escapes. Can be done. Further, for example, when the state changes from the state in which the proximity detection means and the operation detection means are detected to the state in which the operation detection means is detected, the drive means moves the main body to the operation position side. It can be driven and produced by an operating means such that the player should have released his hand from the operation unit but was not separated.

Means B-18. When the main body is driven by the driving means, the operating surface of the operating unit in the non-operating position protrudes outward from the front surface of the gaming machine, and the operating surface of the operating unit is in a protruding state. The gaming machine according to means A-17, wherein the state can be changed to a housed state housed inside a front surface portion of the gaming machine.

According to the means B-18, it is possible to more dynamically produce the operation means by utilizing the displacement of the main body portion. Further, by setting the operation unit in the accommodated state, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the operation unit, and for example, it becomes difficult to perform an act such as banging the operation unit with a palm or a grasped hand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessive operations on the operation unit by the player (to refrain from the act of banging the operation unit), and the operation means is deteriorated or damaged at an early stage. Can be suppressed.

On the other hand, by setting the operating unit in a protruding state, the operating surface of the operating unit projects outward from the front surface of the gaming machine, so that the operating unit can be easily operated. Further, by changing the state of the operating means from the housed state to the protruding state, it is possible to make the player feel superiority complex and satisfaction by being able to operate the operating means.

Means B-19. An opening / closing means that can change the state between a closed state that covers at least a part of the operation surface of the operation unit and an open state that does not cover the operation surface is provided.
When the opening / closing means in the open state is changed to the closed state, the closed state is obtained after it is confirmed that the operation detecting means is not detected and the proximity detecting means is not detected. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-14 to B-18, wherein the state change of the above means is started.

According to the means B-19, the opening / closing means is closed after it is confirmed that the player's hand or the like is not close to the operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which the opening / closing member whose state changes to the closed state comes into contact with the player's hand. Further, by covering the operation unit with the opening / closing means, it is possible to refrain from operating the operation unit itself, and it is possible to reduce the operation frequency of the operation means (the number of operations of the operation unit). As a result, the durability of the operating means can be improved (deterioration of the operating means can be delayed), and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is hindered due to the deterioration or damage of the operating means. Can be done.

Means B-20. The operation detecting means includes a piezoelectric means having a piezoelectric body, and the operation detecting means includes a piezoelectric means.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-9 to B-19, characterized in that pressure can be applied to the piezoelectric means by operating the operation unit toward the operation position side. ..

According to the means B-20, for example, the operation of the operation unit can be detected by the voltage generated by applying pressure to the piezoelectric means. Therefore, it is possible to use it for detecting the operation of the operating means without wasting the energy for operating the operating means. Further, for example, by applying a voltage that changes at a predetermined cycle to the piezoelectric means to vibrate the piezoelectric means, it is possible to generate a sound or change the feeling of operating the operation unit.

It should be noted that the piezoelectric means may be electrically connected to an electric device such as a lamp, and the electric device generated by operating the operation unit many times may be used for the electric device. In addition, when it is desired to grasp that the operation unit is continuously operated for a predetermined period, another detection means such as an optical sensor or an electric switch may be used or used in combination instead of the piezoelectric means. desirable.

Means B-21 An operation input state switching means for switching between an operation enabled state in which the detection of the motion detecting means triggers a predetermined state change and an operation disabled state in which the detection of the operation detecting means does not trigger the state change. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to means B-1 to B-20, wherein it is confirmed whether or not the motion detecting means has been detected only in the motion enabled state.

For example, it is difficult to determine whether or not the operation is always enabled, and such a concern becomes even more remarkable especially when the number of operation detecting means is large. In this regard, according to this means, the detection of the motion detecting means is confirmed only when the motion is enabled. As a result, the processing can be simplified.

Means B-22. Equipped with an accessory that is visible to the player and is inaccessible to the player
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-21, wherein the accessory is configured to be capable of changing its mode according to a combination of detections of the motion detecting means.

According to the means B-22, it is possible to derive a novel effect such that the accessory is displaced according to the movement of the player. Further, for example, in front of a pair of left and right motion detecting means, a player can move his / her hand from left to right to tilt the accessory to the right, for example, in a combination of a plurality of motion detecting means. By determining the degree of displacement based on this, it is possible to perform more complicated movements (as if the accessory is remotely controlled by the movement of the player).

Means C-1. The operating means provided on the front side of the gaming machine and
It is provided with an operation detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means.
The operating means
It is equipped with an operation unit that displaces between the operating position when it is operated and the non-operating position when it is not operated.
The operation detecting means has a configuration of detecting that the operation unit is displaced to the operation position.
The operating means is a gaming machine including a driving means capable of displace the operating portion in the non-operating position.

According to the means C-1, the operation unit may be displaced even if the player does not operate the operation unit. As a result, the modes of the operating means can be diversified, and by extension, a novel effect using the operating means itself can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to add novel fun to the operation of the operating means and to diversify the production and playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest.

Means C-2. Equipped with motion detection means that can detect the motion of the player
The driving means is driven based on the detection by the motion detecting means in an operation enabled state in which a predetermined process (for example, a process of executing a predetermined effect) is executed based on the detection of the operation detecting means. The gaming machine according to means C-1, which is controlled.

According to the means C-2, the mode of the operating means can be set according to (reflecting) the movement of the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the association between the player's own movement and the operating means, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Means C-3. The motion detecting means is arranged so as to be able to detect a motion to operate the operating means.
The driving means is characterized in that, triggered by the detection by the motion detecting means, the driving means is started after the proximity detecting means is detected and the operation detecting means is not detected. The gaming machine described in -2.

According to the means C-3, it is possible to grasp in advance that the player intends to operate the operating means. This suggests the result of operating the operating means when the player changes the mode of the operating means or detects an operation of operating the operating means while reaching for the operating means. It can be configured so that the effect is derived. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the interest. Further, when the operation means is set to the operation valid state, or when the mode of the operation means is changed after a predetermined time by using the timer, the timing is arbitrarily determined by the gaming machine, so that the player It may not match well with the excitement of feelings. In this respect, since the present means is configured to change the mode of the operating means by detecting the movement of the player who intends to operate the operating means, such a defect can be eliminated, and the player's feelings and effects can be produced. Can be matched well.

Means C-4. The operating means includes a main body portion that supports the operating portion so as to be relatively displaceable and is provided so as to be relatively displaceable in a direction along the displacement direction of the operating portion with respect to the front surface portion of the gaming machine.
The driving means is configured so that the main body can be displaced.
When the motion detecting means is detected, the driving for displacement of the main body portion toward the operating position side can be started at the stage when the operation detecting means is not detected. The gaming machine according to means C-3.

According to the means C-4, when the player brings his or her hand close to the operating means in order to operate the operating means, the operating unit escapes from the player's hand even though it is not operated. It is possible to perform an effect such as displacement to the operation position side. By performing a novel operation by the operation unit in this way, it is possible to give a stimulus to the game, increase the interest in the operation means, and as a result, improve the interest. Further, by displacing the main body portion to the operation position side, the operation portion can be displaced to the operation position side without displacing the operation portion in the non-operation position side to the operation position side. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the operation detection means is detected even though the player does not directly operate the operation unit.

In addition, "when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the motion detection means is detected, the drive means moves the operation unit to a position where the operation detection means detects the operation position. It may be configured so that it can be displaced to the side. " In this case, it is possible to reliably derive the effect performed when the operation unit is operated (switched on). Therefore, even if the player is confused by the unexpected operation of the operation unit that it retracts before touching it and the player unintentionally forgets to operate the operation unit, the effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means can be surely derived. Can be done. Further, when such a configuration is adopted, "the operation detection means is detected by driving the drive means, and the operation detection means is detected by the player operating the operation unit. Correspondence control (selected effect) performed based on the detection of the operation detection means differs between the case where the operation detection means is detected, that is, the case where the operation detection means is detected without the drive means being driven. May be. In this case, it is possible to further diversify and differentiate (weight) the production. Further, "when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the motion detection means is detected, the operation unit is further restricted from being displaced toward the operation position by the drive means. It may be displaced to the operation position side to the position where it hits the bottom. In addition, the entire operating unit in that state may be more immersive than the surface of the operating means. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the operating unit is struck by an excited player and the operating unit is damaged.

Means C-5. The motion detecting means is arranged so as to be able to detect an object close to the operating means.
When the main body is displaced to the operation position side by the driving means and the motion detecting means arranged so as to be able to detect an object close to the operating means cannot detect the object, the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to means C-4, wherein the driving means displaces the main body portion toward the non-operating position side (returns to the original reference position).

According to the means C-5, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the operating portion that is projected and displaced comes into contact with the player's hand or the like.

Means C-6. After the operation detecting means is detected, when the motion detecting means is not detected, the driving means is driven to drive the operating unit in a direction along the displacement direction of the operating unit. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-5, which is configured so as to be able to project more from the front surface of the gaming machine.

According to the means C-6, when the player tries to take his / her hand off the operation unit after operating the operation unit of the operation means, the operation unit may be attached to the player's hand. can. By performing a novel operation by the operation unit in this way, it is possible to give a stimulus to the game, increase the interest in the operation means, and as a result, improve the interest. Further, the operation unit is configured so that the player's hand may protrude when the player's hand is separated from the operation unit. That is, as in the case where the operation unit is projected by detecting the player's hand approaching the operation unit by the motion detecting means, the hand approaching the player's operation unit and the operating unit that is displaced and displaced are It is possible to avoid a situation in which a collision occurs at an unexpected angle.

Means C-7. Means C-3 to be characterized in that, triggered by the detection by the motion detecting means being continuously performed for a predetermined time, a suggestion effect suggesting a gaming state due to the displacement of the operating unit can be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of C-6.

According to the means C-7, it is possible to increase the pattern in which the mode of the operating means is changed to reflect the movement of the player. In addition, it is possible for the player to feel as if the player has caused a change in the mode of the corresponding movement means by his / her own movement, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Means C-8. A blower as the driving means capable of supplying air to the inside of the operating means is provided.
The operation unit in the non-operation position is configured to be displaceable toward the operation position side and also displaceable on the side opposite to the operation position side.
By supplying air to the inside of the operating means by the blower, the operating portion in the non-operating position can be displaced to the side opposite to the operating position side. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to C-7.

According to the means C-8, the mode of the operating means can be changed by using a blower, such as projecting the operating portion relatively large or vibrating the operating portion. In particular, by using a blower, the operation unit can be projected more quickly and quickly than in the case where the operation unit is projected by a motor or the like. Therefore, the operation unit can be quickly projected by the blower to produce an effect that can give a more impact. A motor, a solenoid, or the like may be provided as the driving means. That is, a motor or the like may be more suitable for finely operating the operation unit (returning after protruding a little, gradually slowing down the protrusion speed, etc.). Further diversification can be achieved.

Means D-1. An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means and
Equipped with a ventilation means that can blow air from the front side of the gaming machine toward the outside of the gaming machine.
A gaming machine characterized in that air can be blown out by the blowing means based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the means D-1, a wind blowing effect can be derived as a part of the effect related to the operation of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect when the operating means is operated, and to improve the playability by associating the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, with the presence or absence of ventilation. It can also be improved. Therefore, it is possible to add novel fun to the operation of the operating means and to diversify the production and playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest.

Means D-2. The operating means
An operating unit (and) that displaces between the operating position when operated and the non-operating position when not operated.
(With an urging means for urging the operating portion to the non-operating position side).
The air blowing means is provided on the front side of the game machine, and has an outlet for blowing air toward the outside of the game machine, an air supply source capable of supplying air to the outlet, the air supply source, and the air supply source. Equipped with a communication pipe that communicates with the outlet
The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein the air supply source is configured by the operating means, and when the operating unit is operated, the air pushed away by the operating unit is ejected from the blowing hole. ..

According to the means D-2, it is possible to perform an effect of switching between a state in which air is blown out to the front side of the gaming machine in which the player is present and a state in which the air is not blown out in response to the player operating the operation unit. .. Therefore, the player can be surprised that the wind is generated by the operation of his / her own operation unit, and can raise the expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Means D-3. The ventilation means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine and serves as an air supply port that blows air toward the outside of the gaming machine and an air supply source that is electrically driven and controlled to supply air to the outlet. The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, wherein the blower is provided with a communication pipe for communicating the blower and the outlet.

According to the means D-3, the air can be surely blown out from the outlet by the blower and the air volume (wind pressure) can be adjusted. Examples of the blower include an air pump and a fan. In addition, soundproofing measures may be taken for the blower so that it is difficult to realize that the blower is driven by the driving sound.

Means D-4. It is configured to be able to supply air from the blower to the operating means.
The gaming machine according to means D-3, wherein the feeling when operating the operation unit is changed by supplying air to the operation means by the blower.

According to means D-4, a blower can be used to change the feel of operating the operating means. That is, the increased air pressure inside the operating means makes it difficult to push the operating portion, or the air is intermittently sent to cause vibration. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the production by using the operating means and the blowing means.

Means D-5. It is configured to be able to supply air from the blower to the operating means.
The operation unit in the non-operation position is configured to be displaceable to the operation position side and to be displaceable to the side opposite to the operation position side.
Means D-3 or means characterized in that the operating portion in the non-operating position is displaceable to the side opposite to the operating position side by supplying air to the operating means by the blower. The gaming machine described in D-4.

According to the means D-5, the mode of the operating means can be changed by using a blower, such as projecting the operating portion relatively large or vibrating the operating portion. In particular, by using a blower, the operation unit can be projected more quickly and quickly than in the case where the operation unit is projected by a motor or the like. Therefore, the operation unit can be quickly projected by the blower to produce an effect that can give a more impact.

Means D-6. A proximity detecting means capable of detecting an operation to operate the operating means is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-3 to D-5, wherein the blower is configured to be able to start driving when the proximity detection means is detected.

According to the means D-6, it is possible to perform an effect by blowing out air at a stage before the player operates the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect or the like that suggests the result or the like when the operation means is operated, and it is possible to diversify the effect.

Further, for example, when an effect of changing the mode of the operation means itself is performed by using the blower means such as the above means D-4, the blower is driven after the operation detection means is detected. Then it's slow and it doesn't work as a production. On the other hand, if the blower is driven at the time when the effect of changing the mode of the operating means itself is decided, there is a concern that the change in the mode of the operating means will be easily exposed before the operating means is operated. Will be done. In this regard, when the blower is started to be driven by the detection of the proximity detection means, the effect using the blower means is sufficiently in time, and the effect is detected before the operation to the operation means. Can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to surely enjoy the effect of changing the mode of the operating means using the blowing means.

Further, for example, when air is normally blown out from the outlet based on the operation of the operating means, the timing shortly before the player operates the operating means, as in the present means, triggered by the detection of the proximity detecting means. Then, when the air is blown out from the outlet by the drive of the blower, the player can be surprised and have a sense of expectation for the air blown out at a timing different from the usual timing. Therefore, the timing at which the air is blown out from the outlet can be set before the operation to the operating means, and the effect of using the blowing means can be further enhanced.

Means D-7. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-2 to D-6, wherein the outlet is formed at or near a portion where a predetermined operation is performed by the player.

According to the means D-7, it is possible for the player to easily notice that the air is being blown out from the outlet. In the case of pachinko machines, the parts that can be operated by the player are the handle, the ball lending button, and the operation part for removing the ball (the shutter that stops the ejection of the game ball from the upper and lower plates). (For moving the game ball from the upper plate to the lower plate or discharging it downward from the lower plate) by opening it, a button for directing, and the like can be mentioned. In the case of a slot machine, a stop button, a bet button, a start lever, a credit settlement button, a production button, a medal slot, and the like can be mentioned.

Means D-8. The communication pipe passes through a first passage that communicates the air supply source and the outlet, a second passage that communicates the air supply source and the outside of the back side of the game machine, and the first passage. Means D-2 to D-7 comprising a first valve capable of adjusting the amount of possible air and a second valve capable of adjusting the amount of air that can pass through the second passage. The gaming machine described in any of.

According to the means D-8, it is possible to switch between a state in which air is blown out from the blowout hole and a state in which air is not blown out, and the amount of air blown out from the blowout port (wind pressure, etc.) can be changed.

Means D-9. Equipped with a movable accessory that is visible and inaccessible from the front of the gaming machine,
The communication pipe includes a third passage that communicates the air supply source and the movable accessory, and a third valve that can adjust the amount of air that can pass through the third valve.
The gaming machine according to means D-8, wherein the movable accessory is displaced by supplying air from the air supply source to the movable accessory through the third passage.

According to the means D-9, the movable accessory can be displaced based on the operation of the player on the operating means. Further, it is possible to switch between a state in which the wind blows out from the outlet, a state in which the movable accessory is displaced, a state in which both of these are performed at the same time, and a state in which both are not performed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production.

Means D-10. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-2 to D-9, wherein a shutter capable of changing the opening area of the outlet is provided.

According to the means D-10, the momentum of the air ejected from the outlet can be changed by changing the area of the outlet. It is also possible to change the part of the outlet from which air is blown out. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the air ejected from the outlet, and it is possible to perform a wider variety of effects.

Means E-1. An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
In a gaming machine provided with an operation detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means.
A plurality of interlocking means that are mechanically interlocked with the displacement of the operation unit,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a target switching means for switching interlocking means interlocking with displacement of the operation unit among the plurality of interlocking means.

According to the means E-1, the player can enjoy the change of the mode such that the interlocking member linked to the operation is switched only by operating the same operating means. Therefore, it is possible to add novel fun to the operation of the operating means and to diversify the production and the playability without bothering the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling of the game, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest. The term "interlocking" includes not only the case of displacement but also the case of state change such as operation (change to functional state).

Means E-2. The target switching means has a first interlocking state in which the first interlocking means is interlocked when the operation means is operated, and a second interlocking state in which the second interlocking means is interlocked when the operation means is operated. It is configured to be switchable to the interlocking state,
A proximity detecting means capable of detecting an operation to operate the operating means is provided.
When it is determined to switch from the first interlocking state to the second interlocking state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the target switching means starts from the first interlocking state triggered by the detection by the proximity detecting means. The gaming machine according to means E-1, characterized by switching to the second interlocking state.

If the timing of switching by the target switching means is too early for the timing of the player operating the operation means, the sound of switching by the target switching means becomes easily noticed, or the switching by the target switching means is performed. However, since the player does not operate the operating means, there is a concern that the switching operation may be wasted. On the other hand, if the timing of switching by the target switching means is too late, there is a concern that the timing of operation of the operating means by the player may not be in time. On the other hand, according to the present means E-2, the switching by the target switching means can be executed at a timing shortly before the operation of the operating means is performed, and the above-mentioned concern can be dispelled.

It should be noted that "a measurement timer for measuring the time during which the proximity detection means is continuously detecting is provided, and the measurement value of the measurement timer is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, which is the first interlocking state. It may be an opportunity to switch from the second interlocking state to the second interlocking state. "

Means E-3. The game according to means E-1 or E-2, wherein the operation of the operating means can be switched to a non-interlocking state that is not interlocked with any of the interlocking means by the target switching means. Machine.

According to the means E-3, the variation when the operating means is operated can be increased, and the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state which is advantageous for the player is made to correspond with whether or not the interlocking means are interlocked. Therefore, the playability can be improved.

Means E-4. A drive means capable of operating the interlocking means and
A proximity detecting means capable of detecting an operation to operate the operating means is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-3, wherein the driving means is configured to be able to start driving when the proximity detecting means is detected.

According to the means E-4, the operation can be started not only at the timing when the interlocking means is triggered by the operation of the operating means but also at the timing shortly before the operation of the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation when the operating means is operated to break the rut, and to match the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player with the timing at which the interlocking means operates. Playability can be improved.

Means E-5. The target switching means has a first interlocking state in which the first interlocking means is interlocked when the operation means is operated, and a second interlocking state in which the second interlocking means is interlocked when the operation means is operated. It is configured to be switchable to the interlocking state,
A proximity detecting means capable of detecting an operation to operate the operating means is provided.
When the operation means is operated in the state where the first interlocking state is switched to the second interlocking state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the operation means is operated.
When the second interlocking state is switched to the first interlocking state when the detection by the proximity detecting means is stopped.
A means characterized in that the second interlocking state may be switched to the first interlocking state when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the first interlocking state is switched to the second interlocking state. The gaming machine according to any one of E-1 to E-4.

According to the means E-5, in the second interlocking state, the first interlocking state may be returned immediately after the detection by the proximity detecting means is stopped, or the second interlocking state may not be returned immediately. As a result, when the operating means is operated again after the hand is released from the operating means, the interlocking means to be interlocked will be different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation when the operating means is operated, and it is possible to match the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, with whether or not the interlocking means to be interlocked changes. Can be improved.

Means E-6. The operating means
An operation unit that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front surface of the gaming machine and is displaced between an operating position when operated and a non-operating position when not being operated.
It is provided with an urging means for urging the operating portion to the non-operating position side.
The operation detecting means is configured to detect that the operation unit is displaced to the operation position.
A first passage that discharges the air pushed out by the operating unit to the back side of the gaming machine when the operating unit is operated and displaced to the operating position.
A second passage for discharging the air pushed out by the operation unit to the front side of the gaming machine, and
A flow rate changing means capable of changing the ratio of the amount of air guided to the first passage and the amount of air guided to the second passage among the air extruded by the operation unit is provided.
The means according to any one of means E-1 to E-5, wherein the interlocking means is formed by the first passage and the second passage, and the target switching means is formed by the flow rate changing means. A game machine.

According to the means E-6, when the player operates the operation unit, it is possible to perform an effect of switching between a state in which air is blown out to the front side of the gaming machine in which the player is present and a state in which the air is not blown out. In addition, the amount of blowout can be adjusted, and the effectability can be improved.

In addition, in order to allow the player to more surely experience the air blown out, "the second guide passage is configured so that the discharged air can be blown to the player. It may be "to be". For example, the operating means or the peripheral portion thereof may communicate with the second guide passage so that the hand operating the operating means is blown with air by the operation of the operating means. Further, corresponding to the means E-4, it may be said that "an air pump for sending air to the second passage side through the first passage is provided".

Means E-7. The operating means
An operation unit that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front surface of the gaming machine and is displaced between an operating position when operated and a non-operating position when not being operated.
It is provided with an urging means for urging the operating portion to the non-operating position side.
The operation detecting means is configured to detect that the operation unit is displaced to the operation position.
The first movable accessory and the second movable accessory as the interlocking means,
The first interlocking member that interlocks with the first movable accessory,
A second interlocking member that interlocks with the second movable accessory,
Displaceable transmission to a first transmission position where the power due to the displacement of the operation unit can be transmitted to the first interlocking member and a second transmission position where the power due to the operation of the operation unit can be transmitted to the second interlocking member. Parts and
The transmission operating means for displace the transmission member to the first transmission position and the second transmission position is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-6, wherein the target switching means is configured by the transmission member and the transmission operation means.

According to the means E-7, when the player operates the operation unit, it is possible to perform an effect of switching between a state in which the first interlocking member is interlocked and a state in which the first interlocking member is not interlocked.

Means F-1. In any of the means A-1 to A-23, the means B-1 to B-22, the means C-1 to C-8, the means D-1 to D-10, and the means E-1 to E-1 to A gaming machine characterized by having any of E-7.

Means F-2. In any of the means B-1 to B-22, the means A-1 to A-23, the means C-1 to C-8, the means D-1 to D-10, and the means E-1 to E-1 to A gaming machine characterized by having any of E-7.

Means F-3. In any of the means C-1 to C-8, the means A-1 to A-23, the means B-1 to B-22, the means D-1 to D-10, and the means E-1 to E-1 to A gaming machine characterized by having any of E-7.

Means F-4. In any of the means D-1 to D-10, the means A-1 to A-23, the means B-1 to B-22, the means C-1 to C-8, and the means E-1 to E-1 to A gaming machine characterized by having any of E-7.

Means F-5. In any of the means E-1 to E-7, the means A-1 to A-23, the means B-1 to B-22, the means C-1 to C-8, and the means D-1 to D-1 to A gaming machine characterized by having any of D-10.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied are shown below.

A. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching An example is a ball game machine provided with a game area in which the game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operating port, etc.) arranged in the game area.

B. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area. A ball-and-ball game machine provided with a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) so that the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

C. The game machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball game machines, is a pachinko machine or a game machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

D. The gaming machine in each of the above means shall be a rotating gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) composed of a plurality of identification information (designs) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel). It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after (rotation of, etc.), and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. An example is a "reel-type gaming machine" configured so that a game value is given on condition that the information is specific identification information.

E. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused (particularly, a gaming machine of a slot machine specification that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium). As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) composed of a plurality of identification information (designs) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel). It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after (rotation of, etc.), and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. The game value is given on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball tray (upper plate, etc.) is provided to take in the game ball from the ball saucer, and the ball saucer is provided with the ball saucer. An example is a gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball, and configured so that a game start condition is satisfied when the game ball is taken in by the take-in means.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 15 ... Lower plate, 19 ... Upper plate, 32 ... Variable winning device, 33 ... Starting winning unit, 33a ... Upper winning opening, 33b ... Lower winning opening, 42 ... Decorative symbol display device, 43L, 43R ... Special display device, 46 ... Hold lamp, 120 ... Production button unit, 125 ... Production button, 224a, 224b ... Start winning switch, 261 ... Main control device, 262 ... Sub control device, 405 ... Main unit, 406 ... Operation unit, 427 ... Operation detection sensor, 432 ... Exhaust passage, AE1 ... Unit side proximity detection sensor, AE2 ... Frame side proximity detection sensor, ME1 to ME10 ... Motion detection sensor.

Claims (2)

An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means and
An approach detection means that can detect the approach of a predetermined object in a non-contact manner,
In a gaming machine provided with a visual mode changing means capable of changing the visual mode.
The gaming machine
In the detection state by the approach detecting means, the state can be changed to a predetermined state in which it can be monitored that the detected state is canceled, and when the condition for changing the state to the predetermined state is satisfied, the visual mode of the visual mode changing means is changed. A means that can execute state teaching control that changes and teaches predetermined information,
A means for continuing the state teaching control for a predetermined period even when the detection state by the approach detecting means is canceled in the predetermined state is provided .
The visual mode changing means is provided at a position where at least a part of the predetermined object arranged at a position detectable by the approach detecting means can overlap with the front view of the gaming machine. Gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a rotating cylinder type gaming machine.

Images